HP LaserJet 9040/9050 Multifunction Printer series User guide

hp LaserJet 9040mfp
hp LaserJet 9050mfp
use
hp LaserJet 9040mfp/9050mfp
User Guide
Copyright and License
Trademark Credits
© 2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Adobe, Acrobat, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
®
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial
errors or omissions contained herein.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are U.S. registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Publication number: Q3726-90907
Edition 1, 11/2004
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Contents
1 The basics
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Features and benefits of the MFP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
External view of MFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Helpful software for increased flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Software for Macintosh computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Installing the printing system software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Uninstalling the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Software for networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
HP Web Jetadmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Communicating by using the HP Jetdirect embedded print server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Communicating by using the HP Jetdirect print server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Embedded Web Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
HP Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Supported operating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
To view HP Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
HP Toolbox sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Loading input trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Loading Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Loading Trays 2, 3, and 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Configuring the trays by using the Paper Handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
2 The control panel
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Control-panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Control panel features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Home screen navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
“What is this?” Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
“Show me how” Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
3 Printing
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Orienting media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Basic printing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Selecting the output bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Selecting an output location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Printing on envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Printing on special paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Printing on letterhead, prepunched paper, or preprinted paper (single-sided) . . . . . . . . . . .58
Printing on labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Printing on transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Guidelines for custom-size paper, card stock, and heavy paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Printing on full-bleed paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Printing on both sides of paper (duplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Using features in the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Setting the registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
To set the registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
ENWW
Contents iii
Different first page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Including a blank back page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Customizing Tray 1 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Printing from Tray 1 when the loaded paper is requested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Manually feeding paper from Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Specifying paper to print on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Benefits of printing by type and size of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Job storage features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Printing a private job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Releasing private jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Deleting a private job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Storing a print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Printing a stored job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Deleting a stored job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Creating a QuickCopying job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Printing additional copies of QuickCopy jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Deleting a QuickCopy job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Proofing and holding a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Printing the remaining copies of a held job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Deleting a held job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4 Copying
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Copy-screen navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cancel button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
OK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Basic copying instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Copying by using the default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Copying by using user-defined settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Copying by using the scanner glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Copying by using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Copying books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Using Job Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Modifying copy settings for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adjusting the copy contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Reducing or enlarging copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Enhancing copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Copying multiple sized originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Creating a stored copy job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Selecting the output bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5 E-mail
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
E-mail screen navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Help button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
From: field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Clear All button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
E-mail basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Introduction to e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Loading documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Sending documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using the address book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Creating a recipient list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Local address book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Typing e-mail body text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
iv
ENWW
6 Faxing
7 Output devices
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
3,000-sheet stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Paper handling features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
3,000-sheet stacker/stapler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Paper handling features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Using the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Multifunction finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Paper handling features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Using the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Making booklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
8-bin mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Output features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
8 Security features
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Using the FIH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Secure Disk Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Data affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Additional Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Security Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Job storage features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
DSS authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
9 MFP maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Cleaning the MFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
General cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Cleaning the ADF delivery system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Managing the print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Non-HP print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Print cartridge authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Print cartridge storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Checking the toner level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Print cartridge conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Order cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Replace cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Printer maintenance kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
10 Problem solving
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Clearing jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Clearing jams from the input tray areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Clearing jams from the duplex printing accessory (duplexer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Clearing jams from the output areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
To clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Solving repeated jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Understanding MFP messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Resolving control panel messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Correcting output quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Preventing wrinkles on envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
ENWW
v
Detecting MFP problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Determining MFP problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Software, computer, and product interface problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Communicating by using an optional HP Jetdirect print server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Communicating by using the HP Jetdirect embedded print server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Checking the MFP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Jetdirect page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Supplies status page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Usage page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
PCL or PS font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Event log page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Printing a paper path test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Appendix A Specifications
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Paper weight equivalence table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Media specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Supported sizes of paper for input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Supported types of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Card stock and heavy paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Acoustical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Appendix B Control panel menus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Retrieve job menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Paper handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Configure device menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Originals submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Copying submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Enhancement submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Sending submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Printing submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Print quality submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
System setup submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
I/O submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Resets submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fax menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Diagnostics menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Appendix C MFP memory and expansion
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Determining memory requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Installing memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
To install DDR memory DIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
To install a compact flash memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Checking memory installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
vi
ENWW
Saving resources (permanent resources). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Web access feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Using the Web access feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Appendix D Regulatory information
Environmental product stewardship program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Protecting the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Toner consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Paper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Plastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
HP LaserJet printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
HP printing supplies returns and recycling program information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Material restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Material safety data sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Extended warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
For more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Appendix E Administration tasks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Embedded Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Configuring and verifying an IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
TCP/IP assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Automatic discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Changing an IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Embedded Web server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Digital sending configuration applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
LDAP addressing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Preferences settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Finding the IP address of the SMTP and LDAP servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Using control panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Device Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Software for networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
HP Web Jetadmin software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Appendix F Using the HTML Help Viewer
Getting more out of help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
To find a help topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
To create a list of favorite help topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
To copy a help topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
To print the current help topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
To find topics using the toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Using the shortcut menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Appendix G Using accessibility shortcut keys in the Help Viewer
Using F6 to switch between the Navigation and Topic Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Shortcut keys for the Help Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Shortcut keys for the Contents tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Shortcut keys for the Index tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Shortcut keys for the Search tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Shortcut keys for the Favorites tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
ENWW
vii
viii
ENWW
1
The basics
Congratulations on your purchase of the HP LaserJet 9040mfp/9050mfp. If you have not done
so, see the HP LaserJet 9040mfp/9050mfp Start Guide provided with the MFP for setup
instructions.
Overview
After the MFP is set up and ready to use, take a few moments to get to know the MFP. This
chapter introduces the following:
●
Features and benefits of the MFP
●
Helpful software for increased flexibility
●
Embedded Web Server
●
HP Toolbox
●
Loading input trays
Features and benefits of the MFP
The HP LaserJet 9040mfp/9050mfp is designed to be shared by a workgroup. Use the MFP to
send black and white or color documents digitally, copy documents, and print documents. The
MFP is a standalone copier that does not require connection to a computer. With the exception of
network printing, you can select all functions at the MFP control panel.
Functions
●
Two-sided copying
●
Image modification
●
Color digital sending
●
Wide-format printing
●
Document finishing
Speed and throughput
ENWW
●
50 pages per minute (ppm) when scanning and printing on letter-size or International
Standards Organization (ISO) A4-size paper (HP LaserJet 9050mfp only)
●
40 ppm when scanning and printing on letter-size or ISO A4-size paper
(HP LaserJet 9040mfp only)
●
25% to 400% scalability when using the scanner glass
●
25% to 200% scalability when using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
●
Transmit Once, Raster Image Processing (RIP) ONCE technology
●
Eight-second standby to first page
●
Duty cycle of up to 300,000 pages per month
●
533 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor
Overview 7
Resolution
●
600 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
●
FastRes 1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full speed
●
Up to 220 levels of gray
Memory
●
256 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 512 MB by using
industry standard 100-pin double data rate dual inline memory modules (DDR DIMMs)
●
Memory Enhancement technology (MET) that automatically compresses data to use RAM
more efficiently
User interface
●
Graphic display on control panel
●
Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for network-connected
products)
●
HP Toolbox software to provide MFP status and alerts and print internal information pages
Language and fonts
●
HP Printer Command Language (PCL) 6
●
HP PCL 5e for compatibility
●
Printer Management Language
●
80 scalable TrueType typefaces
●
HP PostScript 3 emulation (PS)
Copying and sending
●
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats
●
A job Interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)
●
Multiple pages per sheet
●
Operator attendance animations (for example, paper-jam recovery)
●
The ability to copy books
●
E-mail compatibility
●
A sleep feature that saves energy
●
One-pass duplex scanning
Print cartridge
●
No-shake cartridge design
●
Authentic HP print cartridge detection
●
Automatic seal tab removal
8 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
Paper-handling
●
Input
• Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, and
envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes.
• Trays 2 and 3: Two 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically detect standard paper
sizes up to 11 x 17/A3 and allow printing on custom-size paper.
• Tray 4 (2000-sheet input tray): This tray automatically detects standard paper sizes up
to 11 x 17/A3 and allows printing on custom-size paper.
• Automatic Document Feeder (ADF): Holds up to 100 sheets of Letter- or A4-size paper
or 50 sheets of 11 x 17- or A3-size paper.
• Duplex printing: Provides two-sided printing (printing both sides of the paper).
●
Output
• Standard left output bin: The left output bin is located on the left side of the printer. This
bin can hold up to 100 sheets of paper.
The MFP includes one of the following output devices.
• Optional 3000-sheet stacker: Stacks up to 3,000 sheets of paper.
•
Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 100 sheets of paper.
•
Lower bin (face-down): Holds up to 3,000 sheets of paper. The output bins are part
of the output device.
• Optional 3000-sheet stacker/stapler: Provides multiposition stapling for up to 50 sheets
of paper per job, or a maximum job height of 5 mm (0.2 inch).
•
Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 100 sheets of paper.
•
Lower bin (face-down): Holds up to 3,000 sheets of paper. The output bins are part
of the output device.
• Optional multifunction finisher: Provides 1,000 sheets of stacking capacity, stapling for
as many as 50 sheets of paper per document, plus folding and saddle stitching of
booklets that contain up to 10 sheets of paper.
•
Upper bin (face-up and face-down): Holds up to 1,000 sheets of paper.
•
Lower booklet bin: Holds up to 50 booklets.
• Optional 8-bin mailbox: A stacker, collator, or job separator that also provides eight
mailbox bins that can be assigned to individual users or workgroups for easy identification
and retrieval. The 8-bin mailbox can stack up to 2,000 sheets of A4- or letter-size paper in
all the bins.
•
Upper bin (face-up): Holds up to 125 sheets of paper
•
Bins 1 through 8 (face-down): Each holds up to 250 sheets of paper
Connectivity
●
Parallel B connection
●
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) connection (AUX)
●
Local area network (LAN)-connector (RJ-45) for the embedded print server
●
Optional analog fax card
●
Optional HP Digital Sending Software
●
Optional HP Jetdirect EIO print server cards
• Universal serial bus (USB), serial, and LocalTalk
• Fast Ethernet 10/100TX
• Wireless 802.11b
ENWW
Features and benefits of the MFP 9
Environmental features
●
Note
Sleep setting saves energy (meets E NERGY S TAR ® guidelines, Version 1.0
HP LaserJet 9050mfp only)
See Protecting the environment for more information.
Firmware updates
Firmware updates provide the ability to upgrade the MFP firmware. To download the latest
firmware, go to www.hp.com/go/lj9040mfp_firmware or www.hp.com/go/lj9050mfp_firmware and
follow the instructions on the screen. To easily send firmware updates to multiple products, use
the HP Web Jetadmin software (go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin).
Internal hard disk
The internal hard disk can be used to store selected print jobs. It can support RIP ONCE
technology, and can permanently store downloaded fonts and forms in the MFP. Unlike standard
product memory, many items on the hard disk remain in the MFP even when the MFP is turned
off. Fonts that are downloaded to the hard disk are available to all users of the MFP.
Optional HP EIO hard disk
The EIO hard disk accessory can be added to the MFP to provide additional capacity for storing
fonts and forms. The MFP does not use the EIO hard disk accessory for tasks such as RIP
ONCE and stored jobs. The MFP uses the internal hard disk for these tasks.
Both disks can be write-protected through software for additional security.
Use the device storage manager applet in HP Web Jetadmin to delete files and manage fonts on
a mass-storage device. See Embedded Web Server. For more information, see the MFP
software Help.
Hewlett-Packard Company occasionally introduces new software tools for use with your MFP
and accessories. These tools are available from the Internet. For more information, go to
www.hp.com/go/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/go/lj9050mfp_firmware.
Macintosh users
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to download fonts and files. See HP LaserJet Utility or the
HP LaserJet Utility Guide online Help included with your HP LaserJet Utility software for more
information.
Security features
●
Foreign Interface Harness
●
Secure Disk Erase
●
Security lock
●
Job retention
●
DSS authentication
For more information about these features, see Security features.
10 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
Parts and accessories
Type of item
Item
Description or use
Order
number
Paper handling
3,000-sheet
stacker
One 3,000-sheet stacking device. The
device also offers job offset capabilities.
C8084A
3,000-sheet
stacker/stapler
One 3,000-sheet stacking device
provides stapling for as many as
50 sheets of paper per document. The
device also offers job offset capabilities.
C8085A
Multifunction
finisher
Finishing device that provides
1,000 sheets of stacker capacity,
stapling, for up to 50 sheets of paper,
and folding saddle-stitching for booklets
up to 10 sheets of paper.
C8088B
8-bin mailbox
A device that provides a face-up bin
(upper bin) and eight face-down bins
that can be assigned to individual users
or workgroups. The device also
functions as a job separator, stacker,
and sorter/collator.
Q5693A
Print cartridge
(average of
30,000 pages at
approximately 5%
coverage)
Replacement HP maximum capacity,
smart print cartridge.
C8543X
Staple cartridge
Replacement HP 5,000 staple cartridge
for the 3,000-sheet stacker/stapler.
C8091A
Replacement HP 5,000 staple cartridge
for the multifunction finisher.
C8092A
Printing
supplies
ENWW
Features and benefits of the MFP 11
Type of item
Item
Description or use
Memory, fonts,
and mass
storage
SDRAM Double
Data Rate (DDR)
memory DIMMs
(100-pin)
The MFP has two memory DIMM slots.
One is used by factory-installed
memory.
Improves the ability of the MFP to
handle large and stored jobs (maximum
512 MB with HP brand DDR DIMMs).
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
Flash memory
cards
(100-pin)
Cable and
interface
accessories
Order
number
Q3982A
Q2625A
Q2626A
C2627A
C2628A
Permanent storage for fonts and forms.
The MFP supports Type 1 and Type 2
compact flash memory cards.
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
Q2634A
Q2635A
Q2636A
EIO hard disk
Provides an additional 20 gigabytes
(GB) of permanent storage for fonts
and forms.
J6073A
Enhanced EIO
Cards
●
●
●
●
HP Jetdirect Connectivity Card for
USB, serial, and LocalTalk
connectivity
HP Jetdirect 615N Print Server for
Fast Ethernet (10/100Base-TX)
networks (RJ-45 only)
HP 680N Wireless 802.11b
connectivity
HP Jetdirect 625N Print Server for
Fast Ethernet
(10/100/1000Base-TX networks)
J4135A
A customer-installable accessory
that enables the MFP to function as
a stand-alone analog fax machine.
Q3701A
J6057A
J6058A
J7960A
Analog fax
●
Additional
software
features
HP Digital Sending
Software
A software accessory with enhanced
digital sending features including
network authentication.
T196AA
Maintenance kit
Printer
maintenance kit
The kit contains two Type 1 rollers,
seven Type 2 rollers, one transfer roller
assembly, and one fuser assembly.
C9152A
(110 volt)
C9153A
(220 volt)
12 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
External view of MFP
1
1
14
1
2
1
3
1
13
1
4
1
15
1
12
1
5
1
16
1
11
1
6
1
10
1
17
1
19
1
9
1
8
1
18
1
7
1. ADF cover
2. ADF
3. Control panel with touch-screen graphical display
4. Tray 1
5. Right door
6. Vertical transfer door
7. Tray 4
8. Tray 3
9. Tray 2
10. Left door (behind output device)
11. Output device
12. Front door
13. Duplex printing accessory (inside the MFP)
14. ADF output bin
15. Left door
16. Printer power cable
17. Tray 4 power cable
18. EIO slot 1
19. EIO slot 2
Note
ENWW
For specific information about the output bins for each output device, see Selecting the output bin.
Features and benefits of the MFP 13
Helpful software for increased flexibility
Included with the product is a CD-ROM that contains the printing-system software. The software
components and printer drivers on this CD-ROM help you to use the product to its fullest
potential. See the installation notes on the CD-ROM for installation instructions.
Note
For the latest information about the printing system software components, see the readme file on
the Web at www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp. For information
about installing the printing system software, see the install notes on the CD-ROM that was
included with the product.
This section summarizes the software that is included on the CD-ROM. The printing system
includes software for the following operating environments:
●
Microsoft® Windows 9X and Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
●
Microsoft Windows NT® 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP
●
IBM OS/2 version 3.0 or later (also available on the Web)
●
Apple Mac OS 7.5 or later
●
Linux (also available on the Web)
The printing system also includes software for network administrators who use the following
network operating systems:
●
Microsoft Windows 9X and Windows Me
●
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP
●
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
●
Mac OS (EtherTalk)
●
Linux (Web)
●
UNIX® (Web)
Network product installation for UNIX and other network operating systems is available from the
Web or through a local authorized HP distributor.
Note
For a list of printer drivers, updated HP printing system software, and product support information,
go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
Software features
Automatic configuration, Update Now, and Preconfiguration features are available with the
HP LaserJet 9040mfp/9050mfp.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000
and Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for product accessories at
the time of installation.
14 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the MFP since installation, the driver can be
automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication. Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in
the driver.
Note
The Update Now feature is not supported from the client machine in a Point-and-Print
environment. Update Now can be used for locally-installed MFPs, and by the Point-and-Print
server.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a set of tools that you can use to customize and distribute
HP software in managed corporate printing environments. By using HP Driver Preconfiguration,
information technology, (IT) administrators can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for
HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information,
see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
Drivers
Use the printer drivers to gain access to the MFP features and allow the computer to
communicate with the MFP (by using a printer language). Check the installation notes, the
readme file, and the late-breaking readme file on the CD-ROM for additional software and
languages.
The following table lists the printer drivers that are included with the MFP. The most recent
drivers are available at www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp. (If
you do not have access to the Internet, see the HP support flyer.) Depending on the
configuration of Windows-based computers, the installation program for the printing system
software automatically checks the computer for Internet access in order to obtain the latest
drivers.
Note
The PCL 5e printer driver for all operating systems, plus the PCL 6 and PS printer drivers for
Windows NT 4.0, are available on the CD-ROM. However, these printer drivers are not installed
during typical installation. To install one of these drivers, use the Add Printer Wizard.
Operating systema
PCL 5e
PCL 6
PSb
Windows 9X and
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0,
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
➼
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Macintosh OS
PPDc
➼
a.Not all of the MFP features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the contextsensitive Help in your driver for available features.
b.PostScript (PS) 3 emulation is referred to as PS throughout this guide.
c. Only PostScript Printer Description (PPDs) files are included (see PostScript Printer Description
Files (PPDs) and Printer Dialog Extension (PDEs)). If you need the Apple printer driver, it comes
with the Macintosh operating system (OS), or it can be obtained directly from Apple.
ENWW
Helpful software for increased flexibility 15
Note
If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software
installation, you can download the latest drivers from www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp. After you are connected, click Downloads and Drivers to find
the driver that you want to download.
You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by
requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. You can download the UNIX
installers at www.hp.com/support/net_printing.
Note
If the printer driver that you want is not on the CD-ROM or it is not listed in this section, check the
installation notes, the readme file, and the late-breaking readme file to see if the printer driver is
supported. If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program that you
are using and request a driver for the MFP.
Additional drivers
The following drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet or
from HP Customer Care.
●
OS/2 PCL 5e/6 printer driver
●
OS/2 PS printer driver
●
UNIX model scripts
●
Linux drivers
●
HP OpenVMS drivers
Note
The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2. They are not available in
Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, or Japanese.
Note
The HP OpenVMS drivers are available at h71000.www7.hp.com.
Choose the correct printer driver for your needs
Choose a printer driver based on the way that you use the MFP. Certain MFP features are
available only in the PCL 6 drivers. See the printer driver Help for available features.
Note
●
Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of the MFP features. For general office printing,
the PCL 6 driver is recommended to provide optimum performance and print quality.
●
Use the PCL 5e driver if you need backward compatibility with previous PCL printer drivers
or older products.
●
Use the PS driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript-specific programs such as
Adobe and Corel, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS font DIMM
support.
The MFP automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
Printer driver Help
Each printer driver has help screens that can be activated by clicking the Help button, pressing
the F1 key, or clicking the question mark symbol in the upper-right corner in the printer driver
(depending on the Windows operating system in use). These help screens give detailed
information about the specific driver. Printer driver Help is separate from the software program
Help.
16 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
Gaining access to the printer drivers
Use one of the following methods to gain access to the printer drivers from your computer:
ENWW
Operating
system
Temporarily change
settings
(from a software
program)
Change print job
default settings
(across all software
programs)
Change
configuration
settings (for
example, add a new
input tray)
Windows 9X,
Windows NT, and
Windows Me
On the File menu, click
Print. Select the MFP,
and then click
Properties. (The actual
steps can vary; this is the
most common method.)
Click the Start button,
point to Settings, and
then click Printers.
Right-click the
appropriate MFP icon,
and then select
Properties (Windows 98
and Windows Me) or
Document Defaults
(Windows NT 4.0).
Click the Start button,
point to Settings, and
then click Printers.
Right-click the
appropriate MFP icon,
and then select
Properties. Click the
Configure tab.
Windows 2000
and Windows XP
On the File menu, click
Print. Select the MFP,
and then click Properties
or Preferences. (The
actual steps can vary;
this is the most common
method.)
Click the Start button,
point to Settings, and
then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
Right-click the MFP icon,
and then select Printing
Preferences.
Click the Start button,
point to Settings, and
then click Printers.
Right-click the
appropriate MFP icon,
and then select
Properties. Click the
Device Settings tab.
Macintosh OS 9.1
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want on
the various pop-up
menus.
On the File menu, click
Print. As you change
settings on the pop-up
menu, click Save
Settings.
Click the desktop printer
icon. From the Printing
menu, click Change
Setup.
Macintosh OS X
10.1
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want on
the various pop-up
menus.
On the File menu, click
Print. As you change
settings on the various
pop-up menus, click
Save Custom Settings.
These settings are saved
as the Custom option. To
use the new settings, you
must select the Custom
option each time that you
open a program and
print.
Delete the MFP and
reinstall it. The driver will
be automatically
configured with the new
options when the driver is
reinstalled (AppleTalk
connections only.)
Configuration settings
might not be available in
Classic mode.
Helpful software for increased flexibility 17
Operating
system
Temporarily change
settings
(from a software
program)
Change print job
default settings
(across all software
programs)
Change
configuration
settings (for
example, add a new
input tray)
Macintosh OS X.2
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want on
the various pop-up
menus.
On the File menu, click
Print. Change settings
on the various pop-up
menus. On the Presets
pop-up menu, click Save
as, and type a name for
the preset. These
settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use
the new settings, you
must select the saved
preset option each time
that you open a program
and print.
Open the Print Center.
(Select the hard drive,
click Applications, click
Utilities, and then
double-click Print
Center.) Click the print
queue. On the Printers
menu, click Show Info.
Select the Installable
Options menu.
On the File menu, click
Print. Change settings
on the various pop-up
menus. On the Presets
pop-up menu, click Save
as, and type a name for
the preset. These
settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use
the new settings, you
must select the saved
preset option each time
that you open a program
and print.
Open the Printer Setup
Utility. (Select the hard
drive, click Applications,
click Utilities, and then
double-click Printer
Setup Utility.) Click the
print queue. On the
Printers menu, click
Show Info. Select the
Installable Options
menu.
Macintosh OS X.3
On the File menu, click
Print. Change the
settings that you want on
the various pop-up
menus.
Configuration settings
might not be available in
Classic mode.
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions
(PDEs), and the HP LaserJet Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
The embedded Web server can be used by Macintosh computers when the MFP is connected to
a network.
PostScript Printer Description Files (PPDs) and Printer Dialog Extension
(PDEs)
Use PPDs, in combination with the PostScript drivers, to gain access to the MFP features and to
allow the computer to communicate with the MFP. An installation program for the PPDs, PDEs,
and other software is provided on the CD-ROM. Use the appropriate PS driver that is provided
with the operating system.
18 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
HP LaserJet Utility
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the printer driver. Use the
illustrated screens to select the MFP features that you want. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to
perform the following tasks:
Note
●
name the MFP, assign it to a zone on the network, and download files and fonts
●
configure and set the MFP for Internet protocol (IP) printing
The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for Macintosh OS X, but the utility is supported
for the Classic environment.
Installing the printing system software
The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software.
The MFP comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD-ROM. The printing
system software on the CD-ROM must be installed to take full advantage of the MFP features.
If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive, you can download the printing system software
from the Internet at www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
Note
Sample model scripts for UNIX (HP-UX®, Sun Solaris) and Linux networks are available for
download at www.hp.com/support/net_printing.
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98,
Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, and Windows XP.
Note
If you are installing the software on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, or
Windows XP, make sure that you have administrator privileges.
When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software
before connecting the parallel cable. If the parallel cable was connected before the software
installation, see Installing the software after the parallel cable has been connected.
To install the printing system software
1
Close all of the software programs that are open or running.
2
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the welcome screen does not open, start it by
using the following procedure:
a On the Start menu, click Run.
b Type the following information: X:/setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
c Click OK.
3
When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4
Click Finish when the installation is complete. You might need to restart the computer.
5
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is
correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files
on the CD-ROM or the support flyer that came with the MFP, or go to www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for help or more information.
ENWW
Helpful software for increased flexibility 19
Installing Windows printing system software for networks
The software on the CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network. For
network installation on other operating systems, go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp, or see the Network Installation Guide that is included with the
MFP.
The HP Jetdirect print server has a 10/100Base-TX network port. If you need an HP Jetdirect
print server with another type of network port, see Parts and accessories or go to www.hp.com/
support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
The installer does not support MFP installation or MFP object creation on Novell servers. It
supports only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and an MFP. To
install your MFP and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such as HP Web
Jetadmin or HP Install Network Printer Wizard) or a Novell utility (such as NWadmin).
To install the printing system software
1
Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server is configured correctly for the network by
printing a configuration page (see To print an information page). On the second page that
prints, locate the MFP IP address. You might need this address to complete network
installation. If the MFP is using DHCP IP configuration, use the name on the second page.
Otherwise, if the MFP is shut down for an extended period of time, DHCP does not
guarantee that the same IP address will be issued.
2
Close all software programs that are open or running.
3
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the welcome screen does not open, start it by
using the following procedure:
a On the Start menu, click Run.
b Type the following: X:/setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
c Click OK.
Note
4
When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5
Click Finish when installation has completed. You might need to restart the computer.
6
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is
installed correctly.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files
on the CD-ROM or the flyer that came with the MFP, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for help or more information.
Setting up a Windows computer to use the network MFP by using
Windows-sharing
If the MFP is directly connected to a computer with a parallel cable, you can share the MFP on
the network so that other network users can use it.
See your Windows documentation for information about how to make Windows-sharing
available. After the MFP is shared, install the printing system software on all computers that
share the MFP.
20 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks
This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing system
software supports Mac OS versions 8.6 through 9.2.x, Mac OS version 10.1, and later.
The printing system software includes the following components:
●
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
The PPDs, in combination with the PostScript printer drivers, provide access to the MFP
features. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the
CD-ROM that came with the MFP. Use the Apple 8 printer driver that comes with the
computer.
●
HP LaserJet Utility
The HP LaserJet Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer
driver. Use the illustrated screens to select MFP features and complete the following tasks
with the MFP:
• Name the MFP.
• Assign the MFP to a zone on the network.
• Assign an IP address to the MFP.
• Download files and fonts.
• Configure and set the MFP for IP or AppleTalk printing.
Note
The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for Macintosh OS X, but the utility is supported
for the Classic environment.
To install printer drivers from Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2
Note
1
Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the
CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop,
and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/<language> folder
of the Starter CD-ROM (where <language> is your language preference). (For example, the
Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the English software.)
3
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4
Open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility that is located in the {Startup Disk}: Applications:
Utilities folder.
5
Double-click Printer (AppleTalk).
6
Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection, click Change.
7
Select the MFP, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
8
On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
The icon on the desktop is generic. All of the specific print panels appear in the print dialog box
in a program.
To install printer drivers from Mac OS 10.1 and later
ENWW
1
Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the
CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop,
and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/<language> folder
of the Starter CD-ROM (where <language> is your language preference). (For example, the
Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the English software.)
Helpful software for increased flexibility 21
3
Double-click the HP LaserJet Installers folder.
4
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5
Double-click the Installer icon for the appropriate language.
6
On your computer hard drive, double-click Applications, double-click Utilities, and then
double-click Print Center.
7
Click Add Printer.
8
Select the AppleTalk connection type on OS X 10.1 and the Rendezvous connection type on
OS X 10.2.
9
Select the MFP name.
10 Click Add Printer.
11 Close the Print Center by clicking the close button in the upper-left corner.
Note
Macintosh computers cannot be connected directly to the MFP by using a parallel port.
Installing the software after the parallel cable has been connected
If you have already connected a parallel cable to a Windows computer, the New Hardware
Found Wizard appears when you turn on the computer.
To allow the Wizard to search the CD and automatically install the printing system
software
1
In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search CD-ROM drive.
2
Click Next.
3
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is
installed correctly.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files
on the CD-ROM or the flyer that came with the MFP, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for help or more information.
Uninstalling the software
This section explains how to uninstall the printing system software.
To remove software from Windows operating systems
Use the Uninstaller in the HP LaserJet 9040mfp/Tools program group or the
HP LaserJet 9050mfp/Tools program group to select and remove any or all of the Windows
HP printing system components.
1
Click Start and then click Programs.
2
Click the MFP name and then click Tools.
3
Click Uninstaller.
4
Click Next.
5
Select the HP printing system components that you want to uninstall.
6
Click OK.
7
Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the uninstallation.
22 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
To remove software from Macintosh operating systems
Drag the HP LaserJet folder and PPDs to the trash can.
Software for networks
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM that is
included with the MFP.
HP Web Jetadmin
Use HP Web Jetadmin to manage HP Jetdirect connected products within your intranet by using
a browser. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only
on a single network administration server. It can be installed and run on Red Hat Linux; Suse
Linux; Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation; Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and
Advanced Server; and Windows XP with Service Pack 1.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host
systems, visit HP Customer Care Online at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
When HP Web Jetadmin is installed on a host server, any client can gain access to it through a
supported Web browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape
Navigator 7.0).
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
●
The task-oriented user interface provides configurable views, saving network managers
significant time.
●
The customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function that the
user will view or use.
●
Instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other MFP problems can be
routed to different people.
●
Remote installation and management can be completed from any location by using only a
standard Web browser.
●
The advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network, without manually entering
each MFP into a database.
●
It offers simple integration into enterprise management packages.
●
Users can quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address, color capability,
and model name.
●
Peripherals can be easily organized into logical groups, with virtual office maps for easy
navigation.
●
Multiple products can be configured and managed at the same time.
For the latest information about HP Web Jetadmin, go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
UNIX
The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple installation utility for HP-UX and Solaris
networks. It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at www.hp.com/support/
net_printing.
Utilities
The MFP is equipped with several utilities to make it easy to monitor and manage the MFP on a
network.
ENWW
Helpful software for increased flexibility 23
Embedded Web server
This MFP is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information
about MFP and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which Web
programs can run, similar to the way an operating system, such as Windows, provides an
environment for programs to run on your computer. The output from these programs can then be
viewed in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
When a Web server is “embedded,” that means that it resides on a hardware device (such as an
MFP) or in firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the MFP that
anyone who has a network-connected computer or a standard Web browser can use. You do not
need to install or configure any special software. For more information about the HP embedded
Web server, see the Embedded Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the CDROM that was included with the MFP.
For information about the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see
Embedded Web server.
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a Windows-only software program that can be used for the following tasks:
●
check the MFP status
●
print internal MFP pages
You can view the HP Toolbox when the MFP is connected to a network. You must have
performed a complete software installation before using the HP Toolbox.
For more information about the HP Toolbox, see HP Toolbox.
Other components and utilities
Several software programs are available for Windows and Macintosh OS users, as well as for
network administrators. These programs are summarized in the following table.
Windows
●
●
●
Software installer —
automates the printing
system installation
Online Web registration
HP Toolbox
Macintosh OS
●
●
●
24 Chapter 1 The basics
PostScript Printer
Description files (PPDs) —
for use with the PostScript
drivers that come with the
Mac OS
LaserJet Utility (available
from the Internet) — a
product management utility
for Mac OS users
HP Toolbox (for Mac OS X
v10.2 and later)
Network administrator
●
HP Web Jetadmin —a
browser-based system
management tool (see
www.hp.com/go/
webjetadmin for the latest
●
HP Web Jetadmin software)
HP Jetdirect Printer Installer
for UNIX — available for
download from
www.hp.com/support/
net_printing
ENWW
Communicating by using the HP Jetdirect embedded print
server
The MFP has an embedded print server. If you cannot communicate with the MFP over the
network, check the operation of the embedded print server. Check the embedded Jetdirect
configuration page for the message I/O CARD READY, and for the correct network configuration
settings. See To print a configuration page for instructions.
Verify that the print server was able to link to the network automatically:
●
Check that a link LED on the MFP’s LAN (RJ-45) connector is lit, which indicates a
successful link. A link failure is indicated when both LEDs are off.
●
Check the embedded Jetdirect configuration page for error messages. The message LOSS
OF CARRIER ERROR indicates a link failure.
For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually
configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the MFP control-panel menus
(MENU, CONFIGURE DEVICE, I/O, EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU, LINK SPEED).
Note
HP Jetdirect print servers are available for many different network connections, including
802.11 networks.
Communicating by using the HP Jetdirect print server
If you cannot communicate with the MFP over the network, check the operation of the print
server. Check the Jetdirect configuration page for the message I/O CARD READY.
To print a configuration page
1
On the touch screen of the graphical display touch Menu.
2
Touch Information.
3
Touch Print Configuration.
For troubleshooting information, see the documentation that came with the print server.
Embedded Web Server
The HP LaserJet 9040mfp/9050mfp comes equipped with an embedded Web server. Use the
HP embedded Web server to view the MFP and network card status and to manage printing
functions from your computer. With the HP embedded Web server, you can complete the
following tasks:
ENWW
●
view MFP status information
●
determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones
●
view and change tray configurations
●
view and change the MFP control-panel menu configuration
●
view and print internal pages
●
receive notification of MFP and supplies events
●
add or customize links to other Web sites
●
select the language in which to show the embedded Web server pages
●
view and change network configuration
Embedded Web Server 25
You can also use the embedded Web server to perform the print-job management functions that
would usually be done at the MFP control panel, including these functions:
●
Changing MFP settings
●
Changing MFP configuration
●
Canceling print jobs
To gain access to the embedded Web server
Note
To use the embedded Web server, you must have an IP-based network and a Web browser.
In your Web browser, type the IP address assigned to the MFP. For example, if the MFP IP
address is 169.1.2.3, you would type this address: http://169.1.2.3
For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide at www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a Web application that you can use for the following tasks:
●
Check the MFP status
●
Print internal MFP information pages
You can view the HP Toolbox when the MFP is connected to a network. The HP Toolbox
software is automatically installed as part of the typical software installation.
Note
You do not need Internet access to open and use the HP Toolbox. However, if you click a link in
the Other Links area, you must have Internet access to go the site that is associated with the link.
See Other links for more information.
Supported operating systems
The HP Toolbox is supported for the following operating systems:
●
Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows Server 2003, and Windows XP
●
Macintosh OS 10.2 or later
Supported browsers
To use the HP Toolbox, you must have one of the following browsers:
●
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Internet Explorer 5.2 or later for Macintosh)
●
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later (Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later for Macintosh)
●
Opera Software ASA Opera 7.0 for Windows
●
Safari 1.0 software for Macintosh
All HP Toolbox pages can be printed from the browser.
26 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
To view HP Toolbox
On the Start menu, select Programs, select HP LaserJet 9040mfp/9050mfp, and then select
HP LaserJet Toolbox.
Note
You can also view the HP Toolbox by clicking the system tray icon or the desktop icon.
The HP Toolbox opens in a Web browser.
Note
After you open the HP Toolbox, you can bookmark it in your browser so that you can return to it
quickly in the future.
HP Toolbox sections
The HP Toolbox software contains the following sections and options:
●
Status tab
●
Alerts tab
●
Device Settings button
●
HP Toolbox links
●
Other links
Status tab
The Status tab has links to the following main pages:
●
Device Status. View MFP status information. This page indicates various MFP conditions
such as a paper jam or an empty tray. Use the virtual control panel buttons on this page to
change MFP settings. After you correct a problem with the MFP, click the Refresh button to
update the device status.
●
Supplies Status. View detailed supplies status such as the percent of toner remaining in the
print cartridges and the number of pages that have been printed with the current print
cartridges. This page also has links to order supplies and to find recycling information.
●
Print Info Pages. Print the configuration page and other information pages that are available
for the MFP, such as the Supplies Status page, the Demo page, and the Menu Map.
Alerts tab
Use the Alerts tab to configure the MFP to automatically notify you of MFP alerts. The Alerts tab
has links to the following main pages:
ENWW
●
Set up status alerts
●
Administrative settings
HP Toolbox 27
Set up status alerts page
On the Set up status alerts page, you can choose to turn alerts on or off, specify when the MFP
should send an alert, and select from the following types of alerts:
●
a pop-up message
●
a task bar icon
Click Apply to activate the settings.
On the Administrative settings page, you can set the frequency of how often the HP Toolbox
checks for MFP alerts. The following settings are available:
●
Less often: every 15,000 milliseconds
●
Normal: every 8,000 milliseconds
●
More often: every 4,000 milliseconds
If you want to reduce network I/O traffic, reduce the frequency that the MFP checks for alerts.
Device Settings button
Clicking the Device Settings button connects you to the MFP’s embedded Web server.
See Embedded Web Server for more information.
HP Toolbox links
The HP Toolbox links on the left side of the screen provide links to the following options:
●
Select a device. Select from all of the HP Toolbox-enabled devices.
●
View current alerts. View the current alerts for all of the installed products. (You must be
printing to view current alerts.)
●
Text only page. View HP Toolbox as a site map linking to text-only pages.
Other links
Each page in the HP Toolbox contains links to the HP Web site for the following information:
●
Product registration
●
Product support
●
Ordering supplies
●
HP Instant SupportTM
You must have Internet access to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did
not connect to the Internet when you first opened the HP Toolbox, you must connect to the
Internet before you can visit these Web sites.
28 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
Loading input trays
This section contains information about loading standard- and custom-size media into the four
input trays.
CAUTION
To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 or open Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 while
printing or copying from that tray.
To avoid damaging the MFP, print labels, envelopes, and transparencies from Tray 1 only. Send
labels, envelopes, and transparencies to the upper bin. Print on only one side of labels, envelopes,
and transparencies.
Loading Tray 1
Tray 1 holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes. For more information about supported
media, see Media specifications.
To load Tray 1 for occasional one-time use
Use this procedure if Tray 1 is usually left empty and is used for printing on a variety of sizes or
types of paper.
CAUTION
ENWW
1
Open Tray 1.
2
Load paper according to size and finishing options. See Orienting media for information
about loading preprinted, letterhead, and prepunched paper.
To avoid jams, print sheets of labels one sheet at a time.
Loading input trays 29
Note
3
Adjust the paper guides so they lightly touch the paper stack, but do not bend the paper.
4
Make sure the paper fits under the tabs on the guides and not above the load level
indicators.
If printing on A3- or 11 x 17-size paper, or other long media, also pull out the tray extension until
it stops.
5
Look at the control panel display within a few seconds of loading the paper. (Open and close
the tray again if the time has already elapsed.)
6
If the control panel does not display the message TRAY 1 <TYPE> <SIZE>, then the tray is
ready to use.
7
If the control panel displays TRAY 1 <TYPE> <SIZE>, touch OK to change the size and type
configuration. The size menu is displayed.
8
Touch ANY SIZE. The control panel displays SETTING SAVED.
9
Touch ANY TYPE. The control panel displays SETTING SAVED.
10 If the control panel displays TRAY 1 ANY SIZE ANY TYPE, then the tray is ready for occasional
one-time use for a variety of paper.
11 Touch EXIT to accept the size and type settings.
To load Tray 1 when the same paper is used for multiple print jobs
Use the following procedure if Tray 1 is loaded continually with the same type of paper, and the
paper is not usually removed from Tray 1 between print jobs. The following procedure can also
increase the MFP performance when printing from Tray 1.
CAUTION
Note
To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.
1
Touch MENU.
2
Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3
Touch TRAY 1 SIZE.
4
Touch the correct paper size. The control panel displays SETTING SAVED.
If you select CUSTOM as the paper size, also select the unit of measure and the X and Y dimensions.
5
Touch TRAY 1 TYPE.
6
Touch the correct paper type. The control panel displays SETTING SAVED.
7
Touch EXIT to exit the menus.
30 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
CAUTION
8
Open Tray 1.
9
Load paper according to size and finishing options. See Orienting media for information
about loading preprinted, letterhead, and prepunched paper.
To avoid jams, print sheets of labels one sheet at a time.
10 Adjust the paper guides so they lightly touch the paper stack, but do not bend the paper.
11 Make sure the paper fits under the tabs on the guides and not above the load level
indicators.
Note
If printing on A3- or 11 x 17-size paper, or other long media, also pull out the tray extension until
it stops.
12 Look at the control panel display within a few seconds of loading the paper. The tray
configuration is displayed. (Open and close the tray again if the time has already elapsed.)
13 Touch EXIT to exit the menus. The tray is ready to use.
ENWW
Loading input trays 31
Loading Trays 2, 3, and 4
Trays 2 and 3 hold up to 500 sheets of standard media. Tray 4 holds up to 2,000 sheets of
standard media. For information about paper specifications, see Media specifications.
To load detectable standard-size paper in Trays 2, 3, and 4
Follow this procedure to load detectable standard-size paper in the tray. The following are the
detectable sizes, which are marked inside the tray:
CAUTION
●
A4
●
Letter
●
A3
●
Legal
●
Executive
●
11 x 17
●
B4 (JIS)
●
B5 (JIS)
●
A4-Rotated
●
Letter-Rotated
To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.
1
Open the tray until it stops.
2
Adjust the left (Y) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and set the guide to the
correct paper size.
32 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
Note
3
Adjust the front (X) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and set the guide to the
correct paper size.
4
Load (orient) the paper according to size.
See Orienting media for information about loading preprinted, letterhead, and prepunched paper.
5
ENWW
Set the Custom/Standard switch to Standard.
Loading input trays 33
6
Close the tray.
7
Look at the control panel within a few seconds of closing the tray. (Open and close the tray if
the time has already elapsed.) The control panel displays the tray size and type
configuration. Do one of the following:
• If the size and type settings are correct, touch EXIT to accept the settings.
• If the size and type settings are not correct, touch OK. The TRAY N SIZE=*<SIZE> menu is
displayed.
8
Note
To change the size setting, touch the correct paper size. The message SETTING SAVED is
displayed for a moment, and then the tray type menu is displayed.
Depending on the size that you selected, the MFP might prompt you to move the Custom/Standard
switch in the tray to another position. The MFP might also prompt you to move the paper guides.
Follow the instructions on the control panel, close the tray, and then repeat this procedure starting
with step 7.
9
To change the type setting, touch the correct paper type. The message SETTING SAVED is
displayed for a moment, and then the size and type settings are displayed.
10 If the size and type settings are correct, touch EXIT to accept the settings. The tray is ready
to use.
34 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
To load undetectable standard-size paper in Trays 2, 3, and 4
Follow this procedure to load undetectable standard-size paper in the tray. The following are the
undetectable sizes:
CAUTION
Note
ENWW
●
8K
●
16K
●
A5
●
Statement
●
JIS Executive
●
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330 mm).
To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.
1
Open the tray until it stops.
2
Press the tab on the front paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.
3
Press the tab on the left paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.
4
Load (orient) the paper according to size.
See Orienting media for information about loading preprinted, letterhead, and prepunched paper.
Loading input trays 35
Note
5
Adjust the left paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it gently
touches the paper
6
Adjust the front paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it
gently touches the paper.
When loading Tray 4, make sure that the paper guide lock is in the up position.
7
Set the Custom/Standard switch to Custom.
8
Close the tray.
36 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
9
Look at the control panel within a few seconds of closing the tray. (Open and close the tray if
the time has already elapsed.) The control panel displays the tray size and type settings. Do
one of the following:
• If the size and type settings are correct, touch EXIT to accept the settings.
• If the size and type settings are not correct, touch OK. The TRAY N SIZE=*<SIZE> menu is
displayed.
10 To change the size setting, touch the correct paper size. The message SETTING SAVED is
displayed for a moment, and then the tray type menu is displayed.
Note
Depending on the size that you selected, the MFP might prompt you to move the Custom/Standard
switch in the tray to another position. The MFP might also prompt you to move the paper guides.
Follow the instructions on the control panel, close the tray, and then repeat this procedure starting
with step 9.
11 To change the type setting, Touch the correct paper type. The message SETTING SAVED is
displayed for a moment, and then the size and type settings are displayed.
12 If the size and type settings are correct, touch EXIT to accept the settings. The tray is ready
to use.
Loading custom media in Trays 2, 3, and 4
Use the following procedure to load custom-size paper in the tray.
CAUTION
ENWW
To avoid a jam, never add or remove paper from a tray while printing from that tray.
1
Open the tray until it stops.
2
Press the tab on the front (X) paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.
3
Press the tab on the left (Y) paper guide and slide the guide all the way out.
Loading input trays 37
4
Note
Load (orient) the paper according to size.
See Orienting media for instructions on loading preprinted, letterhead, and prepunched paper.
5
Set the Custom/Standard switch to Custom.
6
Adjust the left (Y) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it
gently touches the paper
7
Adjust the front (X) paper guide by pressing the tab on the guide and slide the guide until it
gently touches the paper.
38 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
8
Note
Note the orientation of the paper, as well as the value of the X dimension and the Y
dimension. The X and Y dimensions are marked in the tray. You will need this information for
a later step.
When loading Tray 4, make sure that the paper guide lock is in the up position.
9
Close the tray.
10 Look at the control panel within a few seconds of closing the tray. (Open and close the tray if
the time has already elapsed.) The control panel displays the tray size and type
configuration.
• If the size and type settings are correct, touch EXIT to accept the settings. The tray is
ready to use. (You do not need to complete the rest of this procedure unless you want to
configure the exact custom dimension. See the following note for more information.)
• To change the size setting, touch OK. The TRAY N SIZE=*<SIZE> menu is displayed.
Note
If the size displayed on the control panel is CUSTOM, then the tray size is set to ANY CUSTOM. The
tray will match any custom-size print job, even if the print-job dimensions are different from the
dimensions of the paper that is loaded in the tray. If you prefer, you can specify the exact
dimensions of the custom-size paper that is loaded in the tray. When you specify exact dimensions,
the dimensions are displayed as the size, rather than CUSTOM.
11 Touch CUSTOM. The UNIT OF MEASURE menu is displayed.
Note
The MFP might prompt you to move the Custom/Standard switch in the tray to another position.
The MFP might also prompt you to move the paper guides. Follow the instructions on the control
panel, close the tray, and then repeat this procedure starting with step 10.
12 Touch unit of measure (MILLIMETERS or INCHES). (If you are using the measurement on the
tray guide, select MILLIMETERS.)
13 Use the numeric keypad to select the X (front to back) dimension.
14 Touch OK.
15 Use the numeric keypad to select the Y (left to right) dimension.
16 Touch OK. The control panel displays SETTING SAVED for a moment. The tray size in
dimensions is then displayed.
17 Touch EXIT to accept the settings. The tray is ready to use.
ENWW
Loading input trays 39
Configuring the trays by using the Paper Handling menu
You can configure the paper type and size for the input trays without a prompt on the MFP control
panel display. Use the following procedure to gain access to the Paper Handling menu and
configure the trays.
To configure the paper size for a tray
Note
1
Touch MENU.
2
Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3
Touch TRAY N SIZE.
4
Touch the paper size loaded.
5
Touch EXIT to exit the menus.
Depending on the size that you selected, the MFP might prompt you to move the Custom/Standard
switch in the tray to another position. The MFP might also prompt you to move the paper guides.
Follow the instructions on the control panel, and then close the tray.
To configure the paper type for a tray
1
Touch MENU.
2
Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3
Touch TRAY N TYPE.
4
Touch the paper type loaded.
5
Touch EXIT to exit the menus.
40 Chapter 1 The basics
ENWW
2
The control panel
Overview
The MFP control panel has a touch-screen graphical display that offers an integrated approach
to copying, e-mail, and printing.
The control panel provides you with all of the features of a standard photocopier, plus printing
and e-mail capabilities. Use the control panel to describe the features of the original document,
to specify any modifications to the scanned image, and to select the features that you want in the
copy. For example, you can describe the original document as an A4-sized, duplexed, text
document, and then you can apply scaling or contrast changes in the copy. Next, select copy
options such as tray and paper size to be used for copying. The graphical display shows a
representative image (page icon) of both the original document and the copy.
In addition, use the control panel menus that to set system defaults, customize settings for a
particular job, and store and retrieve printed and scanned jobs.
This chapter introduces the following control panel topics:
●
Control-panel layout
●
Home screen navigation
●
Help system
Specific information about sending, copying, and printing tasks appear in later chapters.
ENWW
Overview 41
Control-panel layout
The control panel includes a touch-screen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric
keypad, and three light-emitting diode (LED) indicator lights.
1
1
2
1
3
1
13
1
4
1
5
1
12
1
6
1
11
1
7
1
10
1
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1
8
Touch-screen graphical display
Numeric keypad
SLEEP button
MENU button
STATUS button
STOP button
RESET button
START button
CLEAR button
Attention light
Data light
Ready light
Display contrast adjustment
42 Chapter 2 The control panel
ENWW
Control panel features
Features/
Keys
Function
Provides access to “What is this?” Help. This function is embedded in the
touch-screen menus.
ENWW
RESET
Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.
STOP
Cancels the active job.
START
Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or continues a job that has been
interrupted.
Numeric
keypad
Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies required and other numeric
values.
Control-panel layout 43
Home screen navigation
Use the following control-panel elements in the graphical display to gain access to MFP features.
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
1
3
1
4
Touch this to use the copy screen. For more information, see Copy-screen navigation.
Touch this to use the e-mail screen. For more information, see E-mail basics.
Touch this to use the folder screen. For more information, see Sending documents.
Touch this to use the fax screen. For more information, see the HP Fax User Guide.
44 Chapter 2 The control panel
ENWW
Help system
At any time, you can gain access to the help system on the touch screen of the graphical display.
“What is this?” Help
The MFP provides information about any topic on the touch screen of the graphical display. On
the top level screen, touch , and then touch What is this?. After touching an item, a pop-up
dialog box opens and displays information about the item you touched. After reading the
information, touch a clear space on the screen to remove the What is this? pop-up dialog box.
On other levels of the touch screen, you can gain access to the Help system by touching
which is located in the upper-left corner of each screen.
,
“Show me how” Help
The Show me how Help contains information about how to use the MFP features.
1
On the graphical touch-screen display on the control panel, touch Help.
2
Touch Show me how. Choose a topic from the Show Me How Index screen by using the scroll
bar to highlight a topic.
3
Touch OK.
Show me how also appears on a What is this? pop-up dialog box if the item you chose is a
function that includes instructions. For example, if you touch What is this? Help, and then
touch Enhance, you see a Show me how button in the pop-up dialog box. Touch the Show me how
button for information about how to enhance your copies.
Print this topic
To print any of the Show me how instructions,
ENWW
1
Touch
.
2
Touch Show me how.
3
Touch the desired topic.
Help system 45
46 Chapter 2 The control panel
ENWW
3
Printing
Overview
This chapter addresses the following topics:
●
Orienting media
●
Basic printing instructions
●
Selecting the output bin
●
Printing on envelopes
●
Printing on special paper
●
Printing on both sides of paper (duplexing)
●
Using features in the printer driver
●
Setting the registration
●
Different first page
●
Including a blank back page
●
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
●
Customizing Tray 1 operation
●
Specifying paper to print on
●
Job storage features
• Printing a private job
• Storing a print job
• Creating a QuickCopying job
• Proofing and holding a job
ENWW
Overview 47
Orienting media
Orient media types and sizes according to the tray from which the media will print and according
to whether the media will be duplexed (printed on both sides).
Use the following table to determine how to orient paper and other media in the trays.
Type of media
Tray
Two-sided
(duplexed)
Media orientation
Letter or A4, including
letterhead
(weights up to
216 g/m2 )
(58 lb bond)
1
No*
Long edge toward feed direction; side to be
printed on facing up.
Letter or A4, including
letterhead
(weights up to
216 g/m2 )
(58 lb bond)
1
Yes
Long edge toward feed direction; first side
to be printed on facing down.
NOTE
For better duplexing
performance, set the
size and type for
Tray 1
Note: When printing on paper that is both
prepunched and preprinted/letterhead,
orient the paper in the same way that you
would orient preprinted/letterhead paper.
* When Alternate Letterhead mode is enabled and Letterhead or Preprinted is selected as
the media type, you must orient the media for two-sided (duplex) printing. For more
information, see Alternate Letterhead mode.
48 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Type of media
Tray
Two-sided
(duplexed)
Media orientation
Letter or A4, including
letterhead
(weights up to
199 g/m2 )
(53 lb bond)
2, 3, or 4
No*
Long edge toward feed direction; side to be
printed on facing down.
Note: When printing on paper that is both
prepunched and preprinted/letterhead,
orient the paper in the same way that you
would orient preprinted/letterhead paper.
Letter or A4, including
letterhead
(weights up to
199 g/m2 )
(53 lb bond)
2, 3, or 4
Yes
Long edge toward feed direction; first side
to be printed on facing up.
Other standard sizes
and custom sizes
(weights up to
216 g/m2 )
(58 lb bond)
1
No*
Short edge toward feed direction; side to be
printed on facing up.
* When Alternate Letterhead mode is enabled and Letterhead or Preprinted is selected as
the media type, you must orient the media for two-sided (duplex) printing. For more
information, see Alternate Letterhead mode.
ENWW
Orienting media 49
Type of media
Tray
Two-sided
(duplexed)
Media orientation
Other standard sizes
and custom sizes
(weights up to
216 g/m2 )
(58 lb bond)
1
Yes
Short edge toward feed direction; first side
to be printed on facing down.
Other standard sizes
and custom sizes
(weights up to
199 g/m2 )
(53 lb bond)
2, 3, or 4
No*
Short edge toward feed direction; side to be
printed on facing down.
Other standard sizes
and custom sizes
(weights up to
199 g/m2 )
(53 lb bond)
2, 3, or 4
Yes
Short edge toward feed direction; first side
to be printed on facing up.
NOTE
For better duplexing
performance, set the
size and type for
Tray 1
* When Alternate Letterhead mode is enabled and Letterhead or Preprinted is selected as
the media type, you must orient the media for two-sided (duplex) printing. For more
information, see Alternate Letterhead mode.
50 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Type of media
Tray
Two-sided
(duplexed)
Media orientation
Prepunched letter
or A4
(weights up to
216 g/m2 )
(58 lb bond)
1
Either
Long edge with holes toward feed direction;
(first) side to be printed on facing up.
NOTE
For better duplexing
performance, set the
size and type for
Tray 1
Note: When printing on paper that is both
prepunched and preprinted/letterhead,
orient the paper in the same way that you
would orient preprinted/letterhead paper.
Prepunched letter
or A4
(weights up to
199 g/m2 )
(53 lb bond)
2, 3, or 4
Either
Long edge with holes toward feed direction;
(first) side to be printed on facing down.
Note: When printing on paper that is both
prepunched and preprinted/letterhead,
orient the paper in the same way that you
would orient preprinted/letterhead paper.
* When Alternate Letterhead mode is enabled and Letterhead or Preprinted is selected as
the media type, you must orient the media for two-sided (duplex) printing. For more
information, see Alternate Letterhead mode.
ENWW
Orienting media 51
Type of media
Tray
Two-sided
(duplexed)
Media orientation
Labels, letter, A4-size
sheets, or
transparencies
Tray 1
only
No
(Never duplex)
Long edge toward feed direction; side to be
printed on facing up.
Envelopes
Tray 1
only
No
(Never duplex)
Short edge toward feed direction; side to be
printed on facing up and the postage end
toward the MFP. If the height of the
envelope is greater than190 mm
(7.5 inches), feed the flap-edge first.
Otherwise, feed the flap-edge toward rear
of the MFP.
* When Alternate Letterhead mode is enabled and Letterhead or Preprinted is selected as
the media type, you must orient the media for two-sided (duplex) printing. For more
information, see Alternate Letterhead mode.
Alternate Letterhead mode
Windows printer drivers include an Alternate Letterhead mode, which is configured on the Device Settings
tab in the MFP properties (in the Windows control panel). This mode causes all print jobs with media types
of Letterhead and Preprinted to be treated as two-sided (duplexed), so that you can load paper the same
way for one-sided and two-sided (duplex) printing. Because the print speed is the same as it is for two-sided
(duplex) printing, one-sided jobs print at approximately half-speed.
52 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Basic printing instructions
This section provides instructions for printing when you want to set options for the MFP for
Microsoft Windows or Macintosh operating systems. If possible, set the MFP options in the
software program or in the Print dialog box. In most Windows and Macintosh programs, you can
set the MFP options. If a setting is not available in the program or printer driver, you must set it by
using the MFP control panel.
To print
1
Make sure that paper is loaded in the MFP. See Loading input trays or Orienting media for
instructions.
2
If you loaded a custom-size paper in Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4, or if you loaded any size paper
in Tray 1, set the tray to the size of paper that you loaded. See Loading input trays for
instructions.
3
Set the paper size.
• For Windows: On the File menu, click Page Setup or Print. If you select Print, make sure
that this MFP is selected and then click Properties.
• For Macintosh: On the File menu, select Page Setup. Make sure that this MFP is
selected.
4
In the paper size box, select one of the following:
• The size of paper that you are using
• Custom
ENWW
5
Select the orientation, such as Portrait or Landscape.
6
If the printer driver is not already open, on the File menu click Print. In Windows programs,
also click Properties.
7
In the paper source box, select the paper type and size, or select the tray from which you
want paper pulled. See Specifying paper to print on.
8
Select any other settings that you want, such as duplexing, watermarks, or different first
page. For more information about these settings, see the tasks in this section.
9
Click Print to print the job.
Basic printing instructions 53
Selecting the output bin
The MFP has at least two output bin locations: the ADF output bin (1) and the output bin on the
on the output device (2).
4
1
1
5
1
6
1
2
1
3
1
7
1
It is recommended that you select an output location through the software program or printer
driver. For more information, see Selecting an output location.
In addition to the output locations on the output devices, the MFP has an ADF output bin (1).
Stacker or stacker/stapler output bins
If you choose the 3,000-sheet stacker or 3,000-sheet stacker/stapler, the output bins are the
upper bin (2) (face up) and the lower bin (3) (face down).
The upper bin (face-up) (2) is the top bin on the stacker or stacker/stapler. This bin holds up to
100 sheets of paper in face-up order as they exit the MFP. A sensor causes the product to stop
when the bin is full. Product operation continues when you empty or reduce the amount of paper
in the bin.
The lower bin (face-down) (3) is the lower bin on the stacker or stacker/stapler. This bin holds up
to 3,000 sheets of paper and allows you to stack or staple jobs. This bin is the default output bin.
8-bin mailbox output bins
If you choose the 8-bin mailbox, the output bins are the upper bin and the eight face-down bins.
The upper bin (4) holds up to 125 sheets of paper.
The network administrator can assign the eight bins (5) to individual users or workgroups. Each
bin can stack up to 250 sheets of paper.
Multifunction finisher output bins
If you choose the multifunction finisher, the output bins are the upper bin (6) and the lower
booklet bin (7).
The upper bin (6) is the top bin on the multifunction finisher. This bin provides 1,000 sheets of
stacking capacity, and can offset each job as it is stacked, delivering unstapled jobs face up or
face down. This bin also provides stapling for up to 50 sheets of paper per document. The
upper bin is the default output bin when the multifunction finisher is attached.
The lower booklet bin (7) is the lower bin on the multifunction finisher. This bin provides folding
and saddle stitching of booklets for up to 10 sheets of paper.
54 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Selecting an output location
It is recommended that you select an output location (bin) through your program or driver.
(Where and how you make selections depends on your program or driver.) If you cannot select
an output location from the program or driver, set the default product output location from the
MFP control panel.
To select an output location at the control panel
1
Touch Menu.
2
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3
Scroll to and touch Printing.
4
Scroll to and touch Paper Destination to view the output bin options.
5
Scroll to the output bin or device you want, and then touch OK. The control panel displays the
message Setting Saved for a moment, and then returns to the previous screen.
Printing on envelopes
You can print on envelopes from Tray 1 only, which holds up to 10 envelopes. Many types of
envelopes can be printed on from Tray 1.
Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope. Always test a few sample
envelopes before purchasing a large quantity. For envelope specifications, see Media
specifications or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
CAUTION
Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives, or other
synthetic materials can severely damage the MFP. Do not use envelopes with pressure-sensitive
adhesive.
Use the following basic steps to print on envelopes.
Note
1
Load the envelopes in Tray 1. See To load envelopes in Tray 1.
2
Change the fuser levers. See To change the fuser levers.
3
Send the print job. See To print on envelopes from a program.
If envelopes are wrinkled when they exit the MFP, see Preventing wrinkles on envelopes for more
information.
To load envelopes in Tray 1
1
ENWW
Open Tray 1, but do not pull out the extension. (Most envelopes feed best without the
extension. However, oversize envelopes might need the extension.)
Printing on envelopes 55
2
Load up to 10 envelopes in the center of Tray 1 with the side to be printed on facing up, and
the postage end toward the MFP. Slide the envelopes into the MFP as far as they will go
without forcing them.
3
Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes. Make sure that
the envelopes fit under the tabs on the guides.
4
Change the fuser levers (see To change the fuser levers).
To change the fuser levers
1
56 Chapter 3 Printing
Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.
ENWW
2
WARNING!
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.
3
Note
ENWW
Open the left door.
Locate and lift up the two blue levers.
Return the fuser levers to the down position after printing on envelopes.
4
Close the left door.
5
Push the output device back into place.
Printing on envelopes 57
To print on envelopes from a program
CAUTION
CAUTION
1
Load envelopes into Tray 1.
2
In your program or in the printer driver, select Tray 1, as the source.
3
Set the appropriate envelope size and type. For envelope specifications, see Media
specifications.
4
If your program does not automatically format for an envelope, specify “Portrait” for page
orientation.
To avoid a jam, do not remove or insert an envelope after you begin printing.
5
Set margins to within 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the edge of the envelope. For best print quality,
set margins for a return and mailing address (typical address margins for a Commercial #10
or DL envelope are offered). Avoid printing over the area where the three back flaps meet on
the back of an envelope.
6
To print by type and size of paper, see Specifying paper to print on.
7
Select the upper left bin as the output location.
8
When finished printing on envelopes, return the fuser levers to the down position.
Failure to return levers to the down position for standard paper types can result in poor print quality.
Printing on special paper
This section contains guidelines for printing on special media, which includes letterhead, labels,
transparencies, custom-size paper, and heavy paper, and printing on full-bleed paper.
Printing on letterhead, prepunched paper, or preprinted paper
(single-sided)
●
When printing on letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper, be sure to correctly orient the
paper. See Orienting media for instructions.
●
If the paper is heavier than 199 g/m2 (53 lb bond) and lighter than 216 g/m2 (58 lb bond),
load the paper only in Tray 1. See Media specifications.
Printing on letterhead, prepunched paper, or preprinted paper
(double-sided)
●
When printing on letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper, be sure to correctly orient the
paper. See Orienting media for instructions.
●
When printing on both sides of prepunched paper, you must select prepunched paper as the
paper type in the Paper Handling menu at the control panel, or select prepunched paper in
the printer driver.
Printing on labels
CAUTION
●
Orient labels according to the guidelines in Orienting media.
●
Print a stack of up to 50 sheets of labels from Tray 1.
●
Use only labels recommended for laser printers. Make sure that the labels meet the correct
specifications. (See Media specifications and Labels for more information.)
Failure to follow these instructions can damage the MFP.
58 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Special cautions:
●
Do not load Tray 1 to capacity because labels are heavier than paper.
●
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet, wrinkled, or damaged in any
way.
●
Do not use labels that have the backing sheet exposed. (Labels must cover the entire
backing sheet with no exposed spaces.)
●
Do not feed a sheet of labels through the MFP more than once. The adhesive backing is
designed for only one pass through the MFP.
●
Do not print on both sides of labels.
Printing on transparencies
CAUTION
●
Transparencies must be able to withstand 200°C (392°F), which is the maximum
temperature for the MFP.
●
Use only transparencies recommended for use in laser printers. Other transparencies can
damage the MFP.
●
Select the upper bin as the output location for transparencies.
Do not attempt to print on both sides of transparencies. Damage to the MFP or jams might result.
Guidelines for custom-size paper, card stock, and heavy paper
●
You can print on custom-size paper from Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4.
●
Any paper heavier than 199 g/m2 (53 lb) must be printed only from Tray 1. For more
information, see Media specifications.
●
If you are printing from Tray 1, the edge of the paper that feeds into the MFP must be at least
98 mm (3.9 inches) wide to allow rollers inside the MFP to grab the paper. The leading edge
of the paper can be no wider than 312 mm (12.3 inches).
Measuring from the leading edge to the trailing edge of the paper, the length must be a
minimum of 191 mm (7.5 inches) and a maximum of 470 mm (18.5 inches).
●
If you are printing from Tray 2 or Tray 3, the edge of the paper that feeds into the MFP must
be at least 148 mm (5.8 inches) wide to allow rollers inside the MFP to grab the paper. The
leading edge can be no wider than 297 mm (11.7 inches).
Measuring from the leading edge to the trailing edge of the paper, the length must be a
minimum of 210 mm (8.3 inches) and a maximum of 432 mm (17.0 inches).
●
If you are printing from Tray 4, the edge of the paper that feeds into the MFP must be at least
182 mm (7.2 inches) wide to allow rollers inside the MFP to grab the paper. The leading
edge can be no wider than 297 mm (11.7 inches).
Measuring from the leading edge to the trailing edge of the paper, the length must be a
minimum of 210 mm (8.3 inches) and a maximum of 432 mm (17.0 inches).
Printing on full-bleed paper
Because the MFP can print on specially cut paper up to 312 x 470 mm (12.3 x 18.5 inches), you
can print bleed images of up to 297 x 450 mm (11.7 x 17.7 inches) in size by using crop marks.
Full-bleed images can be printed from Tray 1 only. The default for edge-to-edge or full-bleed
printing is “off”. See your program Help for more information.
ENWW
Printing on special paper 59
Printing on both sides of paper (duplexing)
You can set the MFP to print automatically on both sides of the paper.
CAUTION
Never try to print on both sides of labels, envelopes, transparencies, or paper heavier than
199 g/m2 (53 lb). Damage to the MFP or a jam can result.
To print on both sides of paper
1
Note
Load (orient) the paper for duplexing. See Orienting media for instructions.
For better duplexing performance, set the size and type for Tray 1.
2
Select the Print on both sides option from the program or printer driver. If you cannot select
this option from one of those locations, set it at the MFP control panel. (In the Configure
Device menu, select the Printing menu, touch Duplex, and select ON.)
3
Set the Binding and Orientation options from the Print dialog box, if possible. Otherwise,
set them from the MFP control panel. See Layout options for printing on both sides of paper
for more information.
Layout options for printing on both sides of paper
The four print layout options are shown below. Select the binding and orientation options for the
MFP in the Print dialog box, if possible. The terminology in the Print dialog box for the binding
edge might be different from the terms that are listed here.
If you cannot set these options in the Print dialog box, set them at the control panel. Select the
Configure Device menu, select the Printing menu, touch Duplex Binding, and then select
the layout option that you want.
1. Long-edge
portrait (default)
3. Short-edge
portrait
2. Long-edge
landscape
4. Short-edge
landscape
60 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Using features in the printer driver
When you print from a software program, many of the MFP features are available from the printer
driver. For more information about Windows drivers, see Gaining access to the printer drivers.
Note
Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel settings.
(Software program settings generally override printer driver settings.)
MFP collation
The MFP collation feature allows multiple original printing. Collation has the following
advantages:
●
Reduced network traffic
●
Faster return to application
●
All original documents
Saving MFP setup information
In the printer driver, you can save the MFP settings that you use most often, and make those
settings the default settings. For example, if almost all of your print jobs are two-sided (duplexed),
you can save duplex printing as the default setting in the printer driver.
All printer drivers for Windows 2000 and Windows XP, and PCL 6 and PCL 5e printer drivers for
Windows 9X, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 allow you to save MFP print settings for
multiple kinds of print jobs. These saved print settings are called quick sets. For example, you
might want to create one quick set for printing on envelopes, and another quick set for printing
the first page of a document on letterhead.
New printer driver features
Look for Quick Sets, Scale to Fit (any page size to any page size), and Booklet Printing
options in the Windows printer driver, or see the driver online Help for more information.
Printing watermarks
A watermark is a notice, such as “Top Secret,” printed in the background of each page in a
document. Check the driver for available options, or see the driver online help for more
information.
For Macintosh, you can select “Custom” and specify the text you choose, depending on your
driver version.
ENWW
Using features in the printer driver 61
Setting the registration
Use the Set Registration feature to center the front and back images on a page that has been
duplexed (printed on both sides). This feature also allows edge-to-edge printing to be set to
within approximately 2 millimeters of all edges of the paper. Image placement will vary slightly for
each input tray. The alignment procedure must be performed for each tray. An internal-tray
registration page allows the administator to calibrate each tray.
To set the registration
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Configure Device.
3
Touch Print Quality.
4
Touch Set Registration.
You can select a tray by specifying a Source. The default Source is Tray 2. If you want to set the
registration for Tray 2, go to step 7. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
5
Touch Source.
6
Touch a tray. After you touch the tray, the control panel display returns to the Set
Registration menu.
7
Touch Print Test Page.
8
Follow the instructions on the printed page.
62 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Different first page
To print a different first page
Follow these instructions for printing a first page that is different from other pages in the print job.
The instructions are provided for Tray 1, however, you can print a different first page from other
trays.
1
Note
Where and how you make selections depends on your software program or associated printer
driver. (Some options are available only in the printer driver.)
2
ENWW
For Windows, select Use different paper for first page in your driver. Select one tray for the
first page and one of the other trays for the remaining pages. Place the paper for the first
page in the first tray you selected. (For manual feed, place paper in Tray 1 after the job is
sent to the MFP and the MFP requests paper.) For loading Tray 1, place the paper with the
side to be printed up, the top of the page facing the rear of the MFP.
For Macintosh, select First from and Remaining from in the print dialog box.
Load the paper for the remaining pages of the document into another tray. You can select the
first and remaining pages by type of paper. For more information, see Specifying paper to
print on.
Different first page 63
Including a blank back page
This option allows you to add blank pages to the end of a print job.
For Windows, select Use different paper for first page on the Paper tab of your printer driver,
and then select Back Page. You can then select the paper source that you want to use for your
back page. To turn the feature off, select No back page.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature is available in some
drivers and provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
To print more than one page on a sheet of paper, look for a layout or pages-per-sheet option in
the driver. (This is sometimes called 2-up, 4-up, or n-up printing.)
64 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Customizing Tray 1 operation
Customize Tray 1 to fit your printing needs.
The MFP can be set to print from Tray 1 in the following situations:
●
When the tray is loaded and when TRAY 1 SIZE=ANY SIZE and TRAY 1 TYPE=ANY TYPE
(formerly First mode). Print speed might be slower than normal.
●
Only when the type of paper loaded is specifically requested when TRAY 1 SIZE=a specific
size and TRAY 1 TYPE=a specific type (formerly Cassette mode).
Printing from Tray 1 when the loaded paper is requested
When TRAY 1 SIZE=a specific size and TRAY 1 TYPE=a specific type (formerly Cassette mode),
the MFP treats Tray 1 like the internal trays. Instead of looking for paper in Tray 1 first, the MFP
pulls paper starting either from the bottom tray upward or starting with the tray that matches type
or size settings selected in the program from which you are printing.
In the software program or the Print dialog box, select the type and size for a tray, if possible.
Otherwise, set the type and size at the MFP control panel. (See Specifying paper to print on.)
When TRAY 1 SIZE=a specific size and TRAY 1 TYPE=a specific type is set at the MFP control
panel, an option appears in the PAPER HANDLING menu to configure size as well as type settings
for Tray 1.
Manually feeding paper from Tray 1
The manual feed feature is another way of printing on special paper from Tray 1, such as
envelopes or letterhead.
ENWW
Customizing Tray 1 operation 65
Specifying paper to print on
You can configure the MFP to select paper by type (such as plain or letterhead) and size (such
as letter or A4), as opposed to source (a paper tray).
Printing by type and size means that the MFP to pulls paper from the first tray that is loaded with
the type or size that you select. Selecting paper by type rather than source is similar to locking
out trays, which helps to protect special paper from accidental use. (However, selecting the
ANY SIZE, ANY TYPE, or PLAIN setting does not enable the tray lock-out function.)
For example, if Tray 2 is configured for letterhead, and you specify in the driver that you want to
print on plain paper, the MFP will not pull the letterhead from Tray 2. Instead, the MFP pulls
paper from a tray that has plain paper loaded and was configured for plain paper at the MFP
control panel.
Selecting paper by type and size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper,
glossy paper, and transparencies. Using the wrong setting can result in unsatisfactory print
quality. Always print by type for special print media such as labels or transparencies. Always print
by size for envelopes.
Benefits of printing by type and size of paper
If you frequently use several kinds of paper, after the trays are set correctly, you do not have to
check which paper is loaded in each tray before you print. This is useful when the MFP is shared
and more than one person loads or removes paper. Printing by type and size of paper is a way to
be sure that print jobs always print on the appropriate paper.
To set the type for the paper when you are unsure of which type to choose, check the label on the
package of paper. For supported types of paper, see Supported types of paper for more
information.
Note
The type and size settings can also be configured from the embedded Web server or
HP Web Jetadmin software for networked products. See the printer driver online Help.
To print by type and size of paper
Note
Settings in the printer driver and software program override control-panel settings. (Software
program settings generally override printer driver settings.)
1
Load and adjust the trays. (See Loading input trays for more information.)
2
On the touch screen of the graphical display, press MENU, and then touch PAPER HANDLING.
3
Do one of the following:
• To allow the MFP to automatically pull the type and size of paper loaded in Tray 1: Set
TRAY 1 SIZE=ANY SIZE and TRAY 1 TYPE=ANY TYPE.
• To print by type and size from Tray 1: Set TRAY 1 SIZE to the size loaded, and set TRAY 1
TYPE to the type loaded.
• To print by type and size from Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 when the tray is loaded with
standard-size paper: Set the type. If the size is a detectable standard size, it will be
automatically detected. If the size is an undetectable standard size, set the size.
• To print by type and size from Tray 2, Tray 3, or Tray 4 when the tray is loaded with a
custom-size paper: Set the size and type. For the size, select Custom, and then set the
values by using the measurements on the guides in the trays.
4
From the program or driver, select the type and size of paper.
5
Print the job.
66 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Job storage features
The following special job features are available for this MFP:
●
Private jobs: When you send a private job to the MFP, the job does not print until you enter a
PIN at the control panel.
●
Job storage: You can download a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar to
the MFP and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs are copied to the hard
disk and are not deleted if retention space on the MFP becomes limited.
●
QuickCopy jobs: You can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy
of the job on the hard disk in the MFP. Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of
the job later.
●
Proof and hold jobs: This feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy
of a job and then print the additional copies.
Follow the instructions in this section to gain access to the job storage features at the computer.
See the specific section for the type of job you want to create.
CAUTION
If you turn the MFP off, all QuickCopy, Proof and hold, and Private jobs are deleted.
To gain access to the job storage features
For Windows
1
On the File menu, click Print.
2
Click Properties and click the Job Storage tab.
3
Select the Job Storage Mode that you want.
For Macintosh
In newer drivers: Select Job Storage from the pull-down menu in the print dialog box. In older
drivers, select Printer Specific Options.
Printing a private job
Use the private printing feature to specify that a job is not printed until you release it, First, set a
4-digit personal identification number (PIN) by typing the PIN at the MFP control panel. Next,
enter the PIN in the printer driver. The PIN is sent to the MFP as part of the print job.
To create private jobs
To specify that a job is private, in the driver, select the Private Job option, type a User Name and
Job Name, and then type a four-digit PIN. The job will not print until you enter the PIN at the
control panel.
ENWW
Job storage features 67
Releasing private jobs
You can print a private job at the control panel after the job has been sent to the MFP.
To release private jobs
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Retrieve Job.
3
Scroll to and touch your name.
4
Scroll to and touch your job.
5
Touch Print. (The Print icon should have
6
Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.
next to it.)
Deleting a private job
A private job is automatically deleted from the MFP hard disk after you release it for printing. If
you want to delete the job without printing it, use this procedure.
To delete private jobs
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Retrieve Job.
3
Scroll to and touch your name.
4
Scroll to and touch your job.
5
Scroll to Delete. (Delete should have
6
Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.
next to it.)
Storing a print job
You can download a print job to the MFP hard disk without printing it. You can then print the job at
any time at the MFP control panel. For example, you might want to download a personnel form,
calendar, time sheet, or accounting form that other users can print when they need it.
To store a print job on the hard disk, select the Job Storage option in the driver when printing
from the MFP.
To create stored jobs
In the driver, select the Job Storage option and type a user name and job name. The job does
not print until someone requests it at the MFP control panel. See Printing a stored job.
68 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Printing a stored job
At the control panel, you can print a job that is stored on the MFP hard disk.
To print a stored job
1
Touch Menu.
2
Scroll to Retrieve Job.
3
Touch User Name to see a list of names.
4
Scroll to and touch your name to see a list of jobs.
5
Scroll to and touch your job.
6
Touch Print.
7
To print the default number of copies, touch OK. The screen changes to Copies=n. To change
the number, use the numeric keypad or scroll to select a new number, and touch OK.
If Print has
next to it, the job is a private job and requires a PIN. See Printing a private job.
Deleting a stored job
Jobs stored on the MFP hard disk can be deleted at the control panel.
To delete a stored job
1
Touch Menu.
2
Scroll to and touch Retrieve Job.
3
Scroll to and touch your name.
4
Scroll to and touch your job.
5
Scroll to and touch Delete.
6
Touch Yes.
If Delete has
ENWW
next to it, the job requires a PIN to delete. See Printing a private job.
Job storage features 69
Creating a QuickCopying job
The QuickCopy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and stores a copy on the
MFP hard disk. Additional copies of the job can be printed later. This feature can be turned off in
the printer driver.
The default number of different QuickCopy jobs that can be stored on the MFP is 32. At the
control panel, you can set a different default number. See JOB STORAGE LIMIT=32.
To create QuickCopy jobs
CAUTION
If the MFP needs additional space to store newer QuickCopy jobs, the MFP deletes other stored
QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent the MFP
from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option instead of the QuickCopy
option.
In the driver, select the QuickCopy option and type a user name and a job name.
When you send the job to print, the MFP prints the number of copies that you set in the driver. To
print more quick copies at the MFP control panel, see Printing additional copies of QuickCopy
jobs.
Printing additional copies of QuickCopy jobs
This section describes how to print additional copies of a job stored on the MFP hard disk at the
control panel.
To print more copies of a QuickCopy job
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Retrieve Job.
3
Touch User Name to see a list of names.
4
Scroll to your job and touch OK.
5
To print the default number of copies, touch Print. The screen changes to Copies=n. To
change the number, use the numeric keypad or scroll to select a new number, and touch OK.
Deleting a QuickCopy job
Delete a QuickCopy job at the MFP control panel when you no longer need it. If the MFP requires
additional space to store new QuickCopy jobs, the MFP automatically deletes other stored
QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job.
Note
Stored QuickCopy jobs can be deleted at the control panel or in HP Web Jetadmin.
To delete a QuickCopy job
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Retrieve Job.
3
Touch your name.
4
Scroll to and touch your job.
5
Touch Delete.
6
Touch Yes.
70 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
Proofing and holding a job
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job
and then to print the additional copies.
To permanently store the job and prevent the MFP from deleting it when space is needed for
something else, select the Job Storage option in the driver.
To create a proof and hold job
CAUTION
If the MFP needs additional space to store newer proof and hold jobs, the MFP deletes other
stored proof and hold jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent
the MFP from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option in the driver instead
of the Proof and Hold option.
In the driver, select the Proof and Hold option and type a user name and job name.
The MFP prints one copy of the job for you to proof. Then, see Printing the remaining copies of a
held job.
Printing the remaining copies of a held job
At the MFP control panel, use the following procedure to print the remaining copies of a job held
on the hard disk.
To print a proof and hold job
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Retrieve Job.
3
Scroll to User Name.
4
Touch your user name.
5
Scroll to your job, and touch the job.
6
Touch Print. The screen changes to Copies=n. To change the number, use the numeric
keypad or scroll to select a new number, and touch OK.
Deleting a held job
When you send a proof and hold job, the MFP automatically deletes your previous proof and hold
job. If the job name does not have a proof and hold job associated with it, and the MFP needs
additional space, the MFP might delete other proof and hold jobs, starting with the oldest one.
To delete a proof and hold job
ENWW
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Retrieve Job.
3
Scroll to and touch your name.
4
Scroll to and touch your job.
5
Touch Delete.
6
Touch Yes.
Job storage features 71
72 Chapter 3 Printing
ENWW
4
Copying
Overview
This MFP can function as a standalone, walk-up copier. It is not necessary to install the printing
system software on the computer, nor is it necessary to have the computer turned on to make
photocopies. You can adjust the copy settings at the control panel. You can also copy originals
by using either the ADF or the scanner glass. The MFP can process copying, printing, and
digital-sending jobs simultaneously.
This chapter provides information about how to make copies and how to change copy settings,
including the following topics:
●
Basic copying instructions
●
Modifying copy settings for the current job
●
Copying multiple sized originals
●
Creating a stored copy job
●
Selecting the output bin
It is recommended that you review the basic control-panel information before using the MFP
copying functions. See The control panel for more information.
ENWW
Overview 73
Copy-screen navigation
Navigate through the control panel features and options by using the touch-screen graphical
display.
1
2
1
1
3
1
9
1
4
1
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1
7
1
6
1
5
Original section
Image modification section
Copy section
Copy settings button
Copy page icon
Reduce/enlarge
Contrast adjustment
Original page icon
Describe original button
●
Menu: Choose from a list of menus such as the Information menu and the Paper Handling
menu.
●
Help: Choose “What is this?” Help or “Show me how.” (See Help system.)
●
Status messages: View the current status of the MFP, such as Ready or Scanning Page 1.
●
Number of copies selected: View the current number of copies selected. The factory default
setting is 1.
User-attention error messages appear in a pop-up dialog box that prohibits normal screen
interaction until the message is cleared.
Cancel button
Each lower-level screen (any screen after the home screen) has a Cancel button. Touching the
Cancel button negates any changes you made, and takes you back to the previous screen.
OK button
Each lower-level screen on the touch screen has an OK button. Touching the OK button accepts
any changes that you made, and takes you to the next screen.
74 Chapter 4 Copying
ENWW
Basic copying instructions
This section provides the basic instructions for copying. Standard paper sizes are automatically
detected when the document is placed on the scanner glass or loaded in the ADF. You can
override the auto-detect feature by specifying the required input (Describe Original) and output
(Copy Settings) at the control panel.
Copying by using the default settings
The default settings for copying are the following:
Note
●
Number of copies: One
●
Size: Letter/A4-size original and letter/A4-size copy
The MFP automatically detects the original paper size if the size is standard, and makes a
same-size copy. The factory default paper-size setting is Letter or A4, only if no paper is detected.
●
Page Orientation: Portrait
●
Number of Sides: One-sided copying
●
Page Content: Mixed (mixed text and graphics)
●
Job Mode: Off
●
Heavy Paper: Off
To make copies by using the default settings
1
Place the document face down on the scanner glass or in the ADF.
2
Touch Copy.
3
Press START.
Copying by using user-defined settings
Use the following procedure to can change the settings for your copies.
To make copies by using settings other than the default settings
1
Place the original face down on the scanner glass or in the ADF.
On the touch screen of the graphical display, do the following:
2
Touch Copy.
3
Touch Original to view the options. You can select Basic options or Advanced options.
4
Touch the Basic items that describe your original. The following options are available:
• Paper Size: Select the paper size of your original.
• Orientation: Select Portrait or Landscape.
• Number of Sides: Select 1 or 2.
• Content: Select Text, Photo, or Mixed.
5
Touch the Advanced tab to view your options in the Advanced screen. The following options
are available:
• Heavy Paper: Select On if your original is heavy paper.
• Job Mode: If you are combining multiple scans into a single job, select On. (See Using Job
Mode.)
6
ENWW
After you make your selections, touch OK.
Basic copying instructions 75
Note
The page icon in the Original section of the graphical display shows a representative image of
the original document.
7
Make any necessary adjustments to the contrast and reduction or enlargement by using the
Contrast Control bar and the Reduce/Enlarge button in the image modification section of
the graphical display.
8
Touch Copy to view your options. You can select Basic options or Advanced options.
9
Touch the Basic items that describe the characteristics of the copies you are making. The
following options are available:
• Size and Type: Select Auto (paper size is matched to original size), or the copy size that
you desire. Be sure that you have loaded the correct paper size in the tray.
• Number of Sides: Select 1-sided or 2-sided.
• Back Side Orientation: Select Normal or Flip (applies when 2-sided copying is
chosen),
• Pages per sheet: Select 1, 2, 4, or Booklet.
If you select 4 pages per sheet, “Z” or “N” ordering is tailored to the page orientation, and the
option to put a border around each smaller page is displayed.
.
“Z” ordering
“N” ordering
• Borders: Select Border or No Border.
• Staple: Stapling options depend on your output device and the paper size selected.
10 Touch the Advanced options, if necessary. Some of the options include the following items:
• Collation: Select Collated or Uncollated.
• Output Bin: Select the appropriate bin.
• Job Storage: Select On to indicate that the copy job should be stored on the MFP rather
than printed. Select Off to copy the job normally. See Creating a stored copy job for more
information.
• Enhance: touch Sharpness or Background Removal.
Note
The page icon in the Copy section of the graphical display shows a representative image of the
copy.
11 Use the numeric keypad to type the number of copies, and then press START.
76 Chapter 4 Copying
ENWW
Copying by using the scanner glass
Use the scanner glass to copy small, lightweight (less than 46 g/m2 or 12 lb), or irregularly-sized
originals such as receipts, newspaper clippings, photographs, or old or worn documents. The
scanner glass can also be used to copy books, magazines, and manuals.
1
Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
2
Make any image modifications, and select any copy settings, if necessary.
3
If you are making only one copy, press START. If you are making multiple copies, use the
numeric keypad to type the number of copies (up to 999), and then press START to begin
copying.
If you are copying more than one page from the scanner glass, see Using Job Mode to make
a multi-page copy job.
Copying by using the ADF
Use the ADF to make as many as 999 copies of a document that has up to 100 pages
(depending on the thickness of the pages).
1
Load the document face down in the ADF. The MFP can automatically detect the paper size.
2
Make any image modifications, and select any copy settings.
3
If you are making only one copy, press START. If you are making multiple copies, use the
numeric keypad to type the required number of copies, and then press START.
Copying books
You can use the scanner glass to copy books.
Note
1
Place the book face down on the scanner glass.
2
Align the book by using the book bindings. Look for the book graphic at the top of the
scanner glass to check the alignment.
3
Touch Copy.
4
Touch Original.
5
Select Book as the size.
6
Touch OK.
You can skip a page by touching the Skip Page button above the page icon. Touch the button
once to skip the left page, twice to skip the right page, and three times to cancel page skipping.
7
Touch Copy Settings.
8
Select any output settings you want. Select the paper size that is the closest match to the
actual size of the book that you are copying.
9
Touch OK.
10 Use the numeric keypad to type the number of copies that you want.
11 Press START.
Note
ENWW
If you are copying more than one page of a book, see Using Job Mode to make a multiple page
copy job.
Basic copying instructions 77
Using Job Mode
Use the Job Mode feature to build a single print job from multiple scans. You can use either the
ADF or the scanner glass. The settings for the first scan are used for subsequent scans.
1
Touch Copy.
2
Touch Describe Original.
3
Touch Advanced.
4
In the Job Mode check box, touch On.
5
Select any output settings. if necessary
6
After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.
7
Do one of the following:
• If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then press START.
• If the job contains no more pages, touch Finished to print.
Note
In Job Mode, if you scan the first page of a document by using the ADF, then you must scan all
of the pages in that document by using the ADF. If you scan the first page of a document by using
the flatbed scanner, then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using the flatbed
scanner.
Modifying copy settings for the current job
You can modify your copies by adjusting the contrast, reducing or enlarging the size, or
enhancing the quality.
Adjusting the copy contrast
You can adjust the contrast by touching the arrows on the Contrast Control bar. The slider
moves to the lighter or darker area of the Contrast Control bar.
Reducing or enlarging copies
The MFP has an autoscaling feature. If the original paper size differs from the copy paper size,
the MFP can autodetect a size mismatch between the original page size and the copy page size.
The scanned image of the original page is reduced or enlarged automatically to match the copy
paper size. You can override autoscaling by using the reduce and enlarge feature.
The MFP can reduce copies to as little as 25% of the original size and enlarge copies to as much
as 400% of the original (200% when using the ADF).
To reduce or enlarge your copies, touch the arrows on the Reduce/Enlarge button until you reach
the size that you want. The scale percentage box in the center of the Reduce/Enlarge button
indicates the percentage of reduction or enlargement. You can also touch 100% to display the
keypad to type the number that you want. Touch OK to save the changes.
Enhancing copies
You can enhance the quality of your document by touching Enhance to gain access to the
enhancement screen.
78 Chapter 4 Copying
ENWW
Background removal
If you copy a document that is printed on colored paper, or if you use two-sided copying, you can
enhance the copy quality by removing any background that might cause your copy to streak or
blur. Touch the Enhance button to gain access to the embedded Background Removal screen.
Adjust the amount of background removal by touching the arrows on the Background Removal
control. The slider moves to the lighter or darker area of the Background Removal control bar.
Sharpness
The Sharpness control specifies the sharpness setting that the flatbed scanner uses when the
MFP scans your original. Sharpness enhances the edges of the original so that faint or fine text
and graphics are reproduced more sharply. Adjust the amount of sharpness by touching the
arrows on the Sharpness control bar.
Contrast
The Contrast control allows you to determine the contrast and brightness of your copy. Touch the
arrows on the Contrast control, and move the slider to the lighter or darker area of the Contrast
control bar.
Copying multiple sized originals
If the original document contains mixed-size originals, for example, a letter-size document with
several legal-size charts, see Using Job Mode for more information.
Creating a stored copy job
Turning on the job storage setting indicates that you want the copy job to be stored on the hard
disk, and that you will print the job later. You must provide the following information to create a
stored job:
1
Touch Copy.
2
Select your basic copy settings (see Copying by using user-defined settings).
3
Touch the Advanced tab.
4
At the Job Storage box, select On.
A popup dialog box is displayed, asking for the User Name, and Job Name. If Authentication
Required is selected, a Personal Identification Number (PIN), if required. To enter the PIN,
touch the small box next to Authentication Required. The keyboard is displayed when you
select User Name and Job Name. The PIN is a four-digit number that can be typed on the
numeric keypad.
5
Type the User Name.
6
Type the Job Name.
7
Type the PIN, if required.
8
Touch OK.
9
Press START.
See Printing a stored job for information on printing a stored job.
ENWW
Copying multiple sized originals 79
Selecting the output bin
You can select an output bin for copy jobs by using the MFP control panel. For more information
about selecting an output bin, see Selecting the output bin.
80 Chapter 4 Copying
ENWW
5
E-mail
Overview
The MFP offers color-scanning and digital-sending capabilities. By using the control panel, you
can scan black-and-white or color documents and send them to an e-mail address as an e-mail
attachment. To use digital sending, the MFP must be connected to a local area network (LAN).
The MFP connects directly to your LAN (see the HP LaserJet 9040mfp/9050mfp Getting Started
Guide for more information about connecting to a LAN)
Note
The MFP cannot copy or print in color, but it can scan and send color images.
This chapter addresses both scanning and sending, because they are fully integrated functions.
The following topics are addressed in this chapter:
ENWW
●
E-mail screen navigation
●
E-mail basics
●
Using the address book
●
More information
Overview 81
E-mail screen navigation
Use the touch-screen graphical display to navigate through the control-panel options.
1
3
1
2
1
4
1
1
11
1
10
1
9
1
8
1
7
1
6
1
5
1.
2.
Help button
From: field - Can contain defaults set by the administrator. MFP can be configured so
that the user cannot change the From: address.
3. Scroll button
4. E-Mail Settings button
5. Back button
6. Start button
7. Clear All button - Clears all text, except the From: address if this address is set by the
administrator.
8. Subject: button
9. CC: button
10. To: button
11. From: button
Not shown: BCC: button (scroll down to see this button)
Help button
For Help, touch the
system.)
button, and then select “What is this?” Help or “Show me how.” (See Help
From: field
Touch From: to type your e-mail address. The administrator can set up the From: field to
contain an e-mail address that cannot be changed by users.
To:, CC:, and BCC: buttons
Touch these buttons to set up e-mail recipients. To set up e-mail recipients, you can type e-mail
addresses by using the touch screen or by using the address book. For more information, see
Using the address book.
82 Chapter 5 E-mail
ENWW
Clear All button
Touching the Clear All button clears all text and fields that you have typed.
User-attention error messages appear in a pop-up dialog box that prohibits normal screen
interaction until the message is cleared.
ENWW
E-mail screen navigation 83
E-mail basics
Introduction to e-mail
The MFP e-mail feature offers the following benefits:
●
Sends documents to multiple e-mail addresses, saving time and delivery costs.
●
Delivers files in black-and-white or in color. Files can be sent in different file formats that can
be manipulated by the recipient.
●
Provides verification that e-mail was delivered successfully.
With e-mail, documents are scanned into the MFP memory and sent to an e-mail address or
multiple addresses as an e-mail attachment. Digital documents can be sent in several graphics
formats, such as .TFF and .JPG (see Digital sending configuration applet), enabling recipients to
manipulate the document file in various programs to meet their specific needs. Documents arrive
in near-original quality, and then can be printed, stored, or forwarded.
The HP Digital Sending software, which can be purchased separately, offers the additional
benefits of sending to a fax machine, authenticating the user for security purposes, and scanning
to a folder.
In order to use the e-mail feature, the MFP needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area
network that includes Internet access. Otherwise, the MFP can use an LDAP server, version 2
or version 3.
Loading documents
You can scan a document by using either the glass or the ADF. The glass and ADF can
accommodate originals as large as Ledger- and A3-size. Smaller originals, books, manuals,
receipts, irregular and worn documents, stapled documents, previously folded documents, and
photographs should be scanned using the glass. Multiple-page documents can be scanned
easily using the ADF.
Sending documents
The MFP scans both black-and-white and color originals. You can place originals either on the
scanner glass or in the ADF. The scanner glass accommodates most sizes of media, including
irregular-size documents, books, stapled documents, previously folded documents, and
photographs.
You can use default settings or change the scanning preferences and file formats. The following
are the default settings:
●
Color
●
PDF (requires the recipient to have an Adobe® Acrobat® viewer to view the e-mail
attachment)
To send documents
1
Place the document on the scanner glass or in the ADF.
2
Select the type of destination:
• E-mail
• Fax
• Folder
• Secondary e-mail
• Workflow
84 Chapter 5 E-mail
ENWW
3
If prompted, type your user name and password. For more information, see DSS
authentication.
4
Type the information that is needed for sending to the specific file destination.
E-mail
Complete the From:, To:, BCC:, and Subject: fields.
Your user name or other default information might appear in the From:
field. If so, you might not be able to change it.
Fax
Complete the Fax Numbers: field.
Folder
Select a folder destination from the list or type a folder path, if you are
an authenticated user.
Secondary e-mail
Complete the From:, To:, BCC:, and Subject: fields.
Your user name or other default information might appear in the From:
field. If so, you might not be able to change it.
Workflow
Select a Workflow destination.
Type the requested information for the document.
5
(Optional) Use Settings to change the default settings for the scanned document that you
are creating (for example, to change the type of file format that you want).
For more information, see Digital sending configuration applet.
6
(Optional) Use Describe Original to change the default settings (for example, the document
size) for the document that you are sending.
If you are sending a double-sided document, you must describe the original as a two-sided
document. For more information, see Digital sending configuration applet.
7
Press START to begin sending.
8
When you are finished, remove the document from the scanner glass or ADF.
Using the auto-complete function
When you go to the To, CC, or From screens in the Send to E-mail screen, the auto-complete
function is activated. As you type the required address or name by using the keyboard screen,
the MFP automatically searches the address book list and displays the first matching address.
You can then select that name by touching Enter, or continue typing the name until
auto-complete finds the correct entry. If you type a character that does not match any entry in the
list, the auto-complete text is removed from the display to indicate that you are typing an address
that is not in the address book.
ENWW
E-mail basics 85
Using the address book
You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book feature of the MFP. See
your system administrator for information about configuring address lists.
Creating a recipient list
On the touch screen of the graphical display, do the following:
1
Touch E-mail.
2
Touch To: to gain access to the keyboard screen.
3
Type the first letter of the recipient’s name.
4
Touch
5
Navigate the entries in the address book by using the scroll bar. Hold down the arrow to
scroll quickly through the list.
6
Highlight the name to select a recipient, and then touch Add.
to gain access to the address book.
You can also select a distribution list by touching All, or add a recipient from a local list by
touching the Local button. Highlight the appropriate names, and then touch Add to add the
name to your list of recipients.
You can remove a recipient from your list by scrolling to highlight the recipient, and then
touching Remove.
7
The names in the recipient list are placed in the text line of the keyboard screen. If you want,
you can add a recipient that is not found in the address book by typing the e-mail address on
the keyboard. After you are satisfied with your recipient list, touch OK.
8
Touch OK on the keyboard screen.
9
Finish typing information in the CC: and Subject: fields on the Send to E-mail screen, if
necessary. You can check the list of recipients by touching the down arrow in the To: text
line.
10 Press START
86 Chapter 5 E-mail
ENWW
Local address book
Use the local address book to store frequently-used e-mail addresses. The local address book
can be shared between MFPs that use the same server to gain access to the HP Digital Sending
software.
You can use the address book when you type e-mail addresses in the From:, To:, CC:, or BCC:
fields. You can also add or delete addresses in the address book.
To open the address book, touch the address book button in the keyboard screen. When you
touch Local, the Edit button appears. Touch this button to add or delete items from the address
book.
To add e-mail addresses to the local address book
1
Touch Local.
2
Touch Edit.
3
Touch Add.
4
In the Address field, type the e-mail address for the new entry (required).
5
In the Name field, type a name for the new entry (optional).
The Name is the alias for the e-mail address. If you do not type an alias name, the alias will be
the e-mail address itself.
6
Do one of the following:
• To add the e-mail address to the local address book and remain in the Add screen, touch
Save.
• To return to the Edit screen without saving the e-mail address, touch Cancel.
• To save the e-mail address and return to the Edit screen, touch OK.
After you add an address, the following confirmation message is displayed:
Address was stored successfully
The e-mail address is added to the public address book. All users will have access to this
address.
To delete e-mail addresses from the local address book
You can delete e-mail addresses that you no longer use.
Note
To change an e-mail address, you must delete the address and add it as a new address in the
local address book.
1
Touch Local.
2
Touch Edit.
3
Touch Delete to display a list of e-mail addresses that you can deleted from the local
address book. If no addresses exit to delete, the list appears blank.
4
Touch the checkbox(es) for the e-mail address(es) that you want to delete, and then touch
OK.
The following confirmation message is displayed:
Do you want to delete the selected address(es)?
[Yes]
[No]
ENWW
5
Touch Yes to delete the e-mail address(es) or No to return to the Delete screen.
6
To return to the Edit screen, touch OK.
Using the address book 87
Typing e-mail body text
Use the body text feature to type a message when sending e-mail. When you type a message,
the e-mail that you send contains your message, a divider line, and any default text that was set
by your administrator. The message text can contain up to 200 characters.
One line of the e-mail body text is visible in the Keyboard screen. Touch View to open a larger
text box to display more of the message.
More information
For information about finding the IP addresses of the SMTP and LDAP servers, and about
configuring the MFP for digital sending, see Digital sending configuration applet.
88 Chapter 5 E-mail
ENWW
6
Faxing
The MFP supports analog fax capabilities. You can purchase the analog fax separately, see
Parts and accessories for ordering information.
For additional information, see the HP Fax User Guide.
ENWW
89
90 Chapter 6 Faxing
ENWW
7
Output devices
Overview
This chapter includes information on the following output devices:
ENWW
●
3,000-sheet stacker
●
3,000-sheet stacker/stapler
●
Multifunction finisher
●
8-bin mailbox
Overview 91
3,000-sheet stacker
Paper handling features
●
Stacks up to 3,000 sheets of A4- or Letter-size paper
●
Stacks up to 1,500 sheets of A3- or Ledger-size paper
●
Can offset jobs, or offset the first page of jobs, if desired
The lower bin (face-down bin) is the default bin for all output jobs.
3,000-sheet stacker/stapler
Paper handling features
●
Stacks up to 3,000 sheets A4- or Letter-size paper
●
Stacks up to 1,500 sheets of A3- or Ledger-size paper
●
Can offset jobs, or offset the first page of jobs, if desired
The upper bin (face-up bin) is the default bin for all output jobs.
Using the stapler
The 3,000-sheet stacker/stapler can staple documents that contain between two pages and
50 pages of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, or equivalent 5 mm (.2 inches). The pages must be
64 to 199 g/m2 (17 to 53 lb) of all sizes supported by the MFP.
Keep in mind these additional points:
●
The stacking bin can hold up to 3,000 sheets.
●
Heavier media might have a stapling limit of fewer than 50 pages.
●
If the job that you want stapled contains only one sheet, or if it contains more than 50 sheets,
the MFP copies or prints the job. However it will not staple.
You can usually select the stapler in your software program or printer driver, although some
options might be available only in the printer driver. Where and how you make selections
depends on your program or driver.
To select stapling when copying
Note
1
Touch Copy.
2
Touch Side or Top, depending on where you want the documents to be stapled, and then
touch OK.
The page icon on the right side of the control panel shows the position of the staple.
To select stapling as the default setting at the control panel
1
Touch Menu.
2
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3
Scroll to and touch Copying.
4
Scroll to and touch Staple.
5
Scroll to and touch the staple quantity.
92 Chapter 7 Output devices
ENWW
Loading staples
ENWW
1
Move the stacker/stapler away from the MFP.
2
Open the stapler unit door.
3
On the empty staple cartridge, pull up on the green tab, and then pull the empty cartridge
out.
3,000-sheet stacker/stapler 93
4
Insert the new staple cartridge, and push down on the green tab so that the cartridge locks
into place.
5
Close the stapler unit door and push the stacker/stapler back into place.
94 Chapter 7 Output devices
ENWW
Multifunction finisher
Paper handling features
●
Stacks up to 1,000 sheets of A4- and letter-size paper or up to 500 sheets of A3- and
11 x 17-size paper
●
Stacks up to 40 booklets of 5 sheets of A3- and ledger-size paper
●
Can offset jobs
●
Staples up to 50 sheets of paper per document of A4- and letter-size paper
●
Staples up to 25 sheets of paper per document A3- and ledger-size paper
●
Folds single pages
●
Saddle-stitches and folds up to 40 booklets of 5 sheets stacked, or 20 booklets of 10 sheets
stacked.
Using the stapler
The finisher can staple documents that contain between two pages and 50 pages of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) A-4-or letter-size paper or 25 pages of A3- 11 x 17-size paper or equivalent 5.5 mm
(.22 inches). The pages must be 64 to 199 g/m2 (17 to 53 lb) of all sizes supported by the MFP.
Consider these additional points:
●
The upper bin (stacker bin) can hold up to 1,000 sheets stacked (not stapled). The
multifunction finisher can deliver jobs face up or face down to the upper bin.
●
Heavier media might have a stapling limit of fewer than 50 pages.
If the job that you want stapled contains only one sheet, or if it contains more than 50 sheets, the
multifunction finisher delivers the job without staples.
You can usually select the stapler in your software program or printer driver, although some
options might be available only in the printer driver. See Gaining access to the printer drivers for
more information. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or driver.
To select stapling when copying
Note
1
Touch Copy.
2
Touch Copy Settings.
3
In the Staple menu, touch Side or Top, depending on where you want the documents to be
stapled, and then touch OK.
The page icon on the right side of the touch screen shows the position of the staple.
To select stapling as the default setting at the control panel
ENWW
1
Touch Menu.
2
Scroll to and touch Configure Device.
3
Scroll to and touch Staples.
4
Scroll to and touch the staple quantity.
Multifunction finisher 95
Loading staples
1
Open the stapler unit door.
2
Slide the stapler unit toward you.
3
Turn the large green knob until the blue dot appears in the window of the stapler unit.
96 Chapter 7 Output devices
ENWW
4
CAUTION
ENWW
Turn the small green knob at the top of the stapler unit clockwise until the staple cartridge
moves to the left of the stapler unit.
The blue dot must appear in the window of the stapler unit before you remove the staple cartridge.
If you try to remove the staple cartridge before the blue dot appears in the window, you could
damage the finisher.
5
On the empty staple cartridge, squeeze the tabs together and pull the empty cartridge out.
6
Insert the new staple cartridge so that it locks into place.
Multifunction finisher 97
7
Slide the stapler unit into the finisher.
8
Close the stapler unit door and realign the multifunction finisher against the MFP.
98 Chapter 7 Output devices
ENWW
Making booklets
You can gain access to the booklet feature in some software programs, such as desktop
publishing programs. See the user guide that came with your program for information about
making booklets.
If you are using a program that does not support booklet making, you can create booklets by
using the HP printer driver.
Note
HP recommends that you use your program to prepare and preview your document for printing,
and then use the HP printer driver to print and saddle stitch your booklet.
Use the following steps to create a booklet by using the printer driver:
●
Prepare your booklet: Arrange the pages on a sheet (called booklet imposition) to create a
booklet. You can impose your booklet in your software program, or you can use the
booklet-printing feature in printer driver. (See Gaining access to the printer drivers for more
information.)
●
Add a cover: Add a cover to your booklet by selecting a different first page with a different
paper type. You can also add a cover of the same paper type as your booklet. Booklet covers
must be the same size as the rest of the sheets in the booklet. However, the cover can be a
different weight from the rest of the booklet.
●
Use saddle stitching: Paper must be fed into the MFP short edge first. The MFP prompts you
for rotated paper. The multifunction finisher staples the center of your booklet (called saddle
stitching). If your booklet contains only one sheet of paper, the multifunction finisher folds the
sheet, but does not staple it. If the booklet contains more than one sheet of paper, the
multifunction finisher staples the sheets, and then folds up to 10 sheets per booklet.
The booklet-printing feature of the multifunction finisher supports the saddle stitch and fold
feature for the following paper sizes:
●
A3
●
A4-Rotated (A4-R)*
●
Letter-Rotated (Letter-R)*
●
Legal
●
Ledger
See the HP Multifunction Finisher User Guide at www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for more information about making booklets.
* A4-R and Letter-R are A4- and letter-size paper that is rotated 90° in the source tray.
8-bin mailbox
Output features
●
Handles high-capacity output that increases the MFP’s output capacity to 2,000 sheets of
standard media
●
Uses the upper bin to provide 125 sheets of face-up stacking capacity
●
Delivers printed jobs face-down to the eight face-down bins, and each bin provides
250 sheets of stacking capacity
●
Offers stacking options in different operational modes: mailbox, stacker, job separator, and
sorter/collator
For more information about the 8-bin mailbox, see the use guide that came with the 8-bin
mailbox.
ENWW
8-bin mailbox 99
100 Chapter 7 Output devices
ENWW
8
Security features
Overview
This section explains important security features available for your MFP:
ENWW
●
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
●
Secure Disk Erase
●
Security Lock
●
Job storage features
●
DSS authentication
Overview 101
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the MFP. By using the FIH and
third-party equipment, you can track information about copies that are made on the MFP.
Requirements
●
Windows 9X, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
●
Access to third-party accounting hardware solutions, such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices
Using the FIH
To use the FIH, you must download and install the FIH software. The software is available from
www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp. The software is used to
enable or disable the FIH portal. The software also lets you set and change the administrator
Personal Identification Number (PIN).
The PIN option lets administrators configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized changes.
Changes can be made only with the proper PIN authentication.
Note
It is important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration software. The PIN
is required to make any changes to the FIH.
To enable the FIH portal
Note
1
Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.
2
Click OK.
3
Click Enable.
4
If you have not entered a PIN before, click No. If you have entered a PIN before, click Yes.
If you clicked No, type and confirm the PIN, and then click OK. If you clicked Yes, type the
PIN and click OK.
The PIN must be in numerals.
5
Note
Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network.
If you selected Direct, type the MFP port. If you selected Network, type the IP address and
port for the MFP.
The IP address for the MFP can be found on the configuration page. You can print a Configuration
page from the control panel by touching MENU, CONFIGURATION MENU, and then PRINT
CONFIGURATION PAGE.
If you typed an incorrect IP address, you will receive an error message. Otherwise, the portal is
enabled.
To disable the FIH portal
1
Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.
2
Click OK.
3
Click Disable.
4
Type the PIN and click OK.
102 Chapter 8 Security features
ENWW
5
Note
Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network.
If you selected Direct, enter the MFP port and click OK. If you selected Network, type the IP
address and port for the MFP, and then click OK. The portal is disabled.
If the PIN number gets lost and the portal needs to be disabled, try using the default PIN listed
to disable it.
Secure Disk Erase
You might need to protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the MFP hard drive. Secure
Disk Erase is a security feature that you can use to securely erase print and copy jobs from the
hard drive.
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:
●
Non-Secure Fast Erase
This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed, but actual data is retained
on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent data-storage operations. This is the fastest mode.
Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.
●
Secure Fast Erase
Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical character pattern.
This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure Fast Erase meets
the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk media.
●
Secure Sanitizing Erase
This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is repetitively overwritten by
using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This mode will impact
performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M
requirements for the sanitization of disk media.
Data affected
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are
created during the print and copying process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts,
and disk-based macros (forms).
Note
Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the Retrieve
Job menu on the MFP after the appropriate erase mode has been set. (See Deleting a stored job.)
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM
(NVRAM) that is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does
not affect data that is stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact
data that is stored on the flash-based system boot RAM.
Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it
immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes
how the MFP cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase
Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.
ENWW
Secure Disk Erase 103
Additional Information
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or
go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
104 Chapter 8 Security features
ENWW
Security Lock
The security lock is a mechanical lock that is used to prevent the removal of internal computer
components. Optional EIO accessories are not protected, however. Purchase the security lock
assembly separately, and then install it on the MFP.
Job storage features
Several job-storage features are available for this MFP. These features include printing private
jobs, storing print jobs, quick-copying jobs, and proofing and holding jobs.
For more information about job storage features, see Job storage features.
DSS authentication
Optional Digital Sending Software (DSS) for the MFP is available for purchase separately. The
software provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication process. This
process requires users to type a user identification and a password before they can access any
of the DSS features that require authentication.
See Parts and accessories for ordering information.
ENWW
Security Lock 105
106 Chapter 8 Security features
ENWW
9
MFP maintenance
Overview
This section explains basic MFP maintenance:
ENWW
●
Cleaning the MFP
●
Managing the print cartridge
●
Print cartridge conditions
●
Printer maintenance kit
Overview 107
Cleaning the MFP
General cleaning
To maintain print quality, clean the MFP thoroughly:
●
every time you change the print cartridge
●
whenever print-quality problems occur
Clean the outside of the MFP with a lightly water-dampened cloth. Clean the inside with only a
dry, lint-free cloth. Observe all warnings and cautions regarding the cleaning tasks.
WARNING!
Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the MFP. It can be hot.
CAUTION
To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or
around the MFP except as directed.
To clean the paper path
CAUTION
1
Before you begin these steps, turn the MFP off (button out) and disconnect all cables,
including the power cord.
2
Open the front cover of the MFP, rotate the green lever downward to the unlocked position,
and remove the print cartridge.
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, use two hands when removing it from the MFP.
Do not expose the print cartridge to light for more than a few minutes. Cover the print cartridge
when it is outside of the MFP.
108 Chapter 9 MFP maintenance
ENWW
Note
ENWW
If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth, and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot
water sets toner into fabric.
3
With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe any residue from the paper path area, the registration roller,
and the print cartridge cavity.
4
Replace the print cartridge.
5
Rotate the green handle into the locked position.
Cleaning the MFP 109
6
Close the front cover, reconnect all cables, and turn the MFP on (button in).
To clean the outside of the MFP
●
Clean the outside of the MFP if it is visibly marked.
●
Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water, or water and a mild detergent.
To clean the touch screen
CAUTION
●
Clean the touch screen when needed (fingerprints, dust build-up).
●
Wipe the touch screen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touch screen. Do not pour or spray water
directly onto the touch screen.
To clean the glass
CAUTION
●
Clean the glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality,
such as streaking.
●
Clean the glass surface by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an
ammonia-based surface cleaner to dampen the cloth.
Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the glass.
Do not press hard on the glass surface. (You could break the glass).
110 Chapter 9 MFP maintenance
ENWW
Cleaning the ADF delivery system
Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy
quality (such as streaking).
ENWW
1
Lift the top cover.
2
Locate the top and bottom ADF glass strips.
3
Clean the glass strips by wiping them gently with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Use an
ammonia-based surface cleaner to dampen the cloth.
4
Locate the white, vinyl backing.
Cleaning the MFP 111
5
Locate the white, vinyl calibration strips.
6
Clean the ADF backing and the calibration strips by wiping them with a clean, damp, lint-free
cloth. Use an ammonia-based surface cleaner to dampen the cloth.
7
Close the top cover.
To clean the top ADF glass strip
If you are still experiencing poor copy quality, you might need to clean the top ADF glass strip.
CAUTION
Clean this area only if you see copy defects such as streaks, and you notice dust inside the glass
strip. Cleaning this area frequently could introduce dust into the MFP.
1
Open the ADF cover.
112 Chapter 9 MFP maintenance
ENWW
CAUTION
ENWW
2
Locate the latch that releases the top ADF glass strip. Push the latch to the left, and pull
down to expose the inside of the glass strip.
3
Gently wipe the glass with a dry, lint-free cloth.
Use dry cloth only in this area. Do not use solvents, cleaners, water, or compressed air. Doing so
could severely damage the MFP.
4
Pull the latch to the left and return the glass strip to its normal position.
5
Close the ADF cover.
Cleaning the MFP 113
To clean the ADF rollers
You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show
marks as they exit the ADF.
1
CAUTION
CAUTION
Open the top cover.
Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you notice dust
on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the MFP.
2
Locate the rollers near the glass strips.
3
Wipe the rollers gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the MFP.
4
Close the top cover.
114 Chapter 9 MFP maintenance
ENWW
CAUTION
ENWW
5
Open the ADF cover.
6
Locate the rollers.
7
Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the MFP.
8
Close the ADF cover.
9
Close the delivery guide and wipe its outside surface with the cloth.
Cleaning the MFP 115
Managing the print cartridge
When you use a new, authentic HP print cartridge (C8543X), you can obtain the following
supplies information:
●
amount of cartridge life remaining
●
estimated number of pages remaining
●
number of pages printed
●
other supplies information
Non-HP print cartridge
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control
their quality. Service or repairs required as a result of using a non Hewlett-Packard print
cartridge will not be covered under the product warranty.
Print cartridge authentication
When you insert a non-HP print cartridge in the MFP, the MFP will inform you if a cartridge is not
a genuine HP print cartridge. If you insert a used HP cartridge from another HP product, the
MFP can take as many as 20 printed pages to authenticate that the cartridge is a genuine
HP part.
If the MFP control panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you
believe you purchased an HP cartridge, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit.
Print cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
116 Chapter 9 MFP maintenance
ENWW
Checking the toner level
You can check the toner level using the MFP control panel, HP Toolbox, the embedded Web
server, or HP Web Jetadmin.
Using the MFP control panel
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Information.
3
Touch PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.
See Supplies status page for information about the supplies status page.
Using HP Toolbox
The following conditions must be met in order to use this feature:
●
The HP Toolbox software must be installed on your computer. (HP Toolbox is automatically
installed as part of the typical software installation.)
●
The MFP must be connected to a network.
●
You must have access to the World Wide Web to order supplies.
To use HP Toolbox
1
On the Start menu, click Programs, and then click HP toolbox.
HP Toolbox opens in a Web browser.
2
Note
On the left side of the window, click the Status tab, and then click Supplies Status.
If you want to order supplies, click Order Supplies. This opens a browser that produces a URL
where you can purchase supplies. Select the supplies that you want to order and then finish the
ordering process.
Using the embedded Web server
1
In your Web browser, type the MFP’s IP address to access the MFP’s home page. This takes
you to the MFP status page.
2
On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status
page, which provides toner level information. See Supplies status page for information about
the supplies status page.
Using HP Web Jetadmin
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the MFP. The device status page shows toner level information.
ENWW
Managing the print cartridge 117
Print cartridge conditions
Use these procedures when you see a message that relates to the print cartridge, or when you
want to change or replace the print cartridge.
Order cartridge
When the print cartridge is low, the MFP control panel displays the ORDER CARTRIDGE message.
If the ORDER CARTRIDGE message appears, but the MFP continues printing, CARTRIDGE LOW is set
to CONTINUE (the default setting).
If the MFP stops printing when low toner is detected, CARTRIDGE LOW is set to STOP. To resume
printing, press START.
The MFP continues to display CARTRIDGE LOW until you replace the print cartridge.
Select CARTRIDGE LOW=CONTINUE or CARTRIDGE LOW=STOP from the Configuration menu in the
control panel (see System setup submenu).
HP recommends that you place an order for a replacement print cartridge when you first receive
the ORDER CARTRIDGE message. You can order a print cartridge by using the Internet Enabled
Supplies Ordering feature. To do so, click the printer icon on the bottom right of your screen, click
the icon for the MFP that you use, and then click the Order Supplies link on the status page. In
a network environment, use the embedded Web server to order supplies.
Replace cartridge
When the print cartridge is empty, a REPLACE CARTRIDGE message appears on the control panel
display, The MFP continues printing until the MFP receives a drum-out condition, but HP does
not guarantee print quality after this message appears. However, if the REPLACE CARTRIDGE
message results from the drum life being exceeded, you must replace the print cartridge
immediately, and no override is possible. This protects the MFP and the print cartridge from
damage.
Using the MFP cleaning page
Note
To ensure good print quality with certain types of paper, use the cleaning page every time the
print cartridge is replaced. If the cleaning page is frequently needed, try a different type of paper.
If toner specks appear on the front or back side of your print jobs, follow the procedure below.
From the MFP control panel:
Note
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Configure Device.
3
Touch Print Quality.
4
Scroll to and touch Create Cleaning Page. The page automatically prints.
5
Follow the instructions printed on the cleaning page to complete the cleaning process.
6
When toner has been cleaned from inside the MFP, shiny black spots appear on the page
black strip. If white spots appear on the black strip, print another cleaning page.
For the cleaning page to work properly, print the cleaning page on copier-grade paper (not bond
or rough paper).
118 Chapter 9 MFP maintenance
ENWW
Rocking the print cartridge
When you install a print cartridge for the first time, gently rock it from front to back to distribute
the toner evenly inside the cartridge. Due to the new cartridge design, this is the only time you
will need to rock the cartridge.
Configuring alerts
You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the embedded Web server in the MFP to configure the system
to alert you to problems with the MFP. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages that are sent
to the e-mail account or accounts that you specify.
You can configure the following items:
●
the products that you want to monitor.
●
which alerts are to be received (for example, alerts for paper jams, paper out, order
cartridge, replace cartridge, and cover open)
●
the e-mail account to which the alerts should be forwarded
Software
Location for information
HP Web Jetadmin
See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details on
alerts and how to set them up.
Embedded Web server
See Embedded Web Server for general information
about the embedded Web server.
See the embedded Web server Help system for
details on alerts and how to set them up.
You can also receive alerts through the HP Toolbox software. These alerts display as either a
pop-up window or an animated taskbar icon. The HP Toolbox software does not send alerts in
the form of an e-mail message. You can configure the HP Toolbox software to deliver only the
alerts that you want to receive, and you can also specify how often the software checks the
printer status. See HP Toolbox for more information.
ENWW
Print cartridge conditions 119
Printer maintenance kit
Note
The printer maintenance kit is a consumable and is not covered under warranty.
To ensure optimum print quality, HP ecommends that a new printer maintenance kit be installed
approximately every 350,000 pages to ensure print quality. Depending on how you use the MFP,
you might need to replace the kit more often. If you have questions about how frequently you
should replace the printer maintenance kit, contact the support center at www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
When the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message appears on the control panel, you need to
purchase a printer maintenance kit and install the new parts. The part number for the 110-V kit is
C9152A. The part number for the 220-V kit is C9153A. (See Parts and accessories for ordering
information). The printer maintenance kit contains two Type 1 rollers, seven Type 2 rollers, one
transfer roller assembly, and one fuser assembly. Complete instructions for installing the kit
components are included in the printer maintenance kit box.
120 Chapter 9 MFP maintenance
ENWW
10
Problem solving
Overview
This section will help you to troubleshoot and solve MFP problems.
ENWW
Clearing jams
Occasionally, paper can jam during printing. This section will help you to locate
jams, properly clear them from the MFP, and solve repeated jams.
Understanding
MFP messages
Many different messages can appear on the control-panel display. Some
messages tell the current MFP status, such as INITIALIZING. Other
messages require action, such as CLOSE RIGHT DOOR. Most of these messages
are self-explanatory. However, some messages indicate a problem with the
MFP, or require further action or description. This section lists these types of
messages and tells you what to do if a message persists.
Correcting output
quality problems
The MFP should produce print jobs of the highest quality. If print jobs do not
appear sharp and clear, if defects such as lines, specks, or smears appear on
the page, or if paper is wrinkled or curled, use this section to troubleshoot and
solve the print quality problem.
Detecting MFP
problems
Before you can eliminate an MFP problem, you must understand the location
of the problem. Use the tables in this section to determine the MFP problem,
and then follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions.
Software, computer,
and product
interface problems
Use the tables in this section to determine problems with the software or the
computer, and to diagnose interface problems that might affect job production.
Checking the MFP
configuration
From the MFP, you can print information pages, which provide details about
the MFP and its configuration.
Overview 121
Clearing jams
If a jam message appears on the control panel, look for paper in the locations indicated in the
following illustration. You might need to look for jammed media in locations other than those that
are indicated in the jam message. If the location of the jam is not obvious, look first in the front
door area.
After looking at the illustration, you can go to the procedure for clearing the jam. When clearing
jams, be very careful not to tear the media. If a small piece of media remains in the MFP, it could
cause additional jams. If jams are a recurring problem, see Solving repeated jams.
Note
Loose toner might remain in the MFP after a jam and cause output quality problems. These should
clear up within a few pages.
Jam locations
1
1
12
1
11
1
2
1
10
1
3
1
9
1
4
1
8
1
5
1
7
1
6
HP LaserJet 9040mfp or HP LaserJet 9050mfp with the 3000-sheet stacker/stapler
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
ADF
Tray 1
Right door
Vertical transfer door
Tray 4
Tray 2 and Tray 3
Left door (behind the output device)
Duplexer (inside the MFP)
Output device
Lower bin
Front door and print-cartridge area
Upper bin
122 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Clearing jams from the input tray areas
To clear jams in Tray 1
1
Check for media in the Tray 1 area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully check to
be sure you have removed all pieces of torn media.
2
Open and close the right door to reset the MFP.
To clear jams inside the right door
ENWW
1
Open the right door.
2
Check for media in the right door area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully
check to be sure you have removed all pieces of torn media.
Clearing jams 123
3
Open the jam access cover. Pull out and lift the green tab.
4
Remove any media from this area by pulling it out of the MFP.
5
Push the green lever down to the original position.
6
Close the right door.
To clear jams in Trays 2 and 3
1
Open the tray until it stops.
2
Check for media in the tray area, and remove any media from this area. Carefully check to be
sure you have removed all pieces of torn media.
124 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
3
Close the tray.
4
Open and close the right door to reset the MFP.
To clear jams in Tray 4
ENWW
1
Open the vertical transfer door on Tray 4.
2
Check for paper in this area, and remove any paper from this area. Carefully check to be
sure that you have removed all pieces of torn paper.
Clearing jams 125
3
If you did not see any paper in the vertical transfer door, open Tray 4.
4
Check for paper in the tray area, and remove any paper from this area. Carefully check to be
sure you have removed all pieces of torn paper.
5
Close Tray 4.
6
Close the vertical transfer door.
126 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Clearing jams from the duplex printing accessory (duplexer)
To clear jams in the duplex printing accessory
WARNING!
ENWW
1
Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.
2
Open the left door and carefully pull out any paper from area.
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.
3
Remove the duplex printing accessory by pressing the green lever and pulling the unit out
until it stops.
4
Remove any paper by lifting the two green levers in the duplex printing accessory.
Clearing jams 127
5
Open the front door.
6
Check for paper in the duplex printing accessory area, and remove any paper by pulling it
out of the MFP. Be careful not to tear the paper.
7
Reinstall the duplex printing accessory by sliding it back into the slot until it locks into place.
8
Close all open doors. Push the output device back into place.
128 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Clearing jams from the output areas
To clear jams in the stacker or stacker/stapler
Note
ENWW
1
If the jam extends into the output bins, slowly and carefully pull the media straight out of the
MFP so that it does not tear.
2
Move the output device away from the MFP.
3
On the stacker, lift the wire on the lower bin of the device, and carefully pull out any media
from this area. On the stacker/stapler, carefully pull out any media that might be protruding
from the accumulator area.
Only the stacker has the wire on the lower bin.
Clearing jams 129
WARNING!
4
Locate the green handle in the flipper area and lift the handle.
5
Carefully pull out any media from the flipper area.
Avoid touching the flipper area. It can be hot.
6
Locate the green handle in the paper path module, and then pull down on the handle.
7
Carefully pull out any media from the paper path module.
130 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
8
Close all open doors. Push the output device back into place.
To clear jams in the multifunction finisher
ENWW
1
Open the finisher cover.
2
Slowly and carefully pull the paper straight out of the finisher so that it does not tear.
Clearing jams 131
3
Close the finisher cover.
4
Move the finisher away from the MFP.
5
Carefully remove any paper from the MFP output area.
6
Carefully remove any paper from the finisher input area.
132 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
7
Open the stapler-unit door.
8
To clear a booklet jam, turn the bottom green knob clockwise to remove the booklet.
9
Close the stapler-unit door.
10 Push the multifunction finisher back into place.
ENWW
Clearing jams 133
To clear jams in the left door (fuser area)
WARNING!
1
Move the output device away from the MFP to gain access to the left door.
2
Open the left door.
Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It can be hot.
3
Remove any jammed or damaged media from this area by pulling it out of the MFP.
4
Press down on the green tab and carefully check for media. Be sure to remove all pieces of
torn media.
134 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
5
Close the left door. Push the output device back into place.
To clear a staple jam from the stacker/stapler
ENWW
1
Move the stacker/stapler away from the MFP.
2
Open the stapler unit door.
Clearing jams 135
3
Pull the cartridge out.
4
Pull up on the lever labeled with a green dot.
5
Remove the damaged staple.
6
Press down on the lever labeled with a green dot.
136 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Note
ENWW
7
Reinstall the staple cartridge.
8
Close the stapler unit door.
9
Push the stacker/stapler back into place.
The stapler needs to reload after clearing a staple jam, so the first few documents (no more than
five) might not be stapled. If a print job is sent and the stapler is jammed or is out of staples, the
job will still print as long as the path to the output bin is not blocked.
Clearing jams 137
To clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher
1
Open the stapler-unit door.
2
Slide the stapler-unit toward you.
3
Turn the large green knob until the blue dot appears in the window of the stapler unit.
138 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
4
CAUTION
ENWW
Turn the small green knob at the top of the stapler unit clockwise until the staple cartridge
moves to the left of the stapler unit.
The blue dot must appear in the window of the stapler unit before you remove the staple cartridge.
If you try to remove the staple cartridge before the blue dot appears in the window, you could
damage the finisher.
5
Remove the staple cartridge by squeezing the blue tabs together.
6
Pull up on the lever labeled with a green dot.
Clearing jams 139
7
Remove the damaged staple.
8
Press down on the lever labeled with a green dot.
9
Reinstall the staple cartridge until it clicks into place.
10 Slide the stapler unit into the finisher.
140 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
11 Close the stapler-unit door.
In rare instances, a staple jam might occur in the upper half of the stapler head.
ENWW
1
Follow steps 1 through 4 for clearing a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (see To clear
a staple jam from the multifunction finisher).
2
Locate the damaged staple at the back of the stapler unit, and then remove the staple.
3
Follow steps 10 through 11 for clearing a staple jam from the multifunction finisher (see To
clear a staple jam from the multifunction finisher).
Clearing jams 141
To clear jams in the 8-bin mailbox
Note
Check that the paper used is not thicker than the 8-bin mailbox supports. See Media specifications.
1
Move the 8-bin mailbox away from the MFP. To do this, stand on the left side of the MFP and
pull the 8-bin mailbox straight toward you.
2
Carefully remove the upper (face-up) bin.
3
Pull down the handle on the output paper module and remove any jammed paper from this
area.
4
Push the 8-bin mailbox back into place, and then reattach the upper bin.
142 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Solving repeated jams
Situation
Solution
General
repeated jam
problems
1. Check to see that the media is correctly loaded in the trays and that all width
guides are correctly set (see Printing).
2. Make sure that the paper tray is set for the size of media installed and that the
tray is not overloaded.
3. Try turning over the stack of media in the tray. If you are using prepunched or
letterhead paper, try printing from Tray 1.
4. Do not use previously printed media or torn, worn, or irregular media. For
recommended media for your MFP, see Supported types of paper.
5. Check the media specifications. (See Media specifications.) If paper is outside
of the recommended specifications, problems can occur.
6. MFP might be dirty. Clean the MFP as described in Cleaning the MFP.
7. Check that all damaged or jammed media is removed from MFP.
Repeated jams
in the ADF
Note
ENWW
1. The ADF might be dirty. Clean the ADF as described in Cleaning the ADF
delivery system.
If jams continue, contact your HP-authorized service provider. (See the HP support flyer or go to
www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.)
Clearing jams 143
Understanding MFP messages
MFP messages appear on the control-panel display to relay the normal status of the MFP (such
as Processing Job), or an error condition (such as Close Right Door) that needs attention.
Resolving control panel messages lists messages that require attention, or that might raise
questions. Messages are listed in alphabetical order, with numeric messages at the end of the
list. Not all messages are listed, because some (such as Ready) are self-explanatory.
Note
Some MFP messages are affected by the AUTO CONTINUE and CLEARABLE WARNINGS settings in
the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, System Setup submenu, in the control panel (See System setup
submenu).
Using the MFP help system
This MFP features a help system on the control panel that provides instructions for resolving
most MFP errors. Certain control-panel messages alternate with instructions about accessing
the help system.
Whenever a ? appears in an error message or a message alternates with FOR HELP TOUCH ?,
touch the key to view the help.
To exit the help system, touch
.
If a message persists
●
Some messages (for example, requests to load a tray or a message that a previous print job
is still in the MFP memory) allow you to touch Continue to print, or to press STOP to clear the
job and eliminate the message.
●
If a message persists after performing all of the recommended actions, contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/
support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.)
144 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Resolving control panel messages
Message
Explanation or recommended action
Access denied
MENUS LOCKED
Because the control-panel security is active, you cannot open the menus
ACTION NOT
CURRENTLY
AVAILABLE FOR
TRAY X
TRAY SIZE CANNOT
BE ANY SIZE/ANY
CUSTOM
A duplexed document was requested from a tray that is set to Any Size or Any
Custom. Duplexing is not allowed from a tray configured to Any Size or Any
Custom. Select another tray or reconfigure the tray.
ADF Cover Open
Close the ADF cover. Follow the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
ADF PAPER JAM
A jam has occurred in the ADF.
Follow the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
ADF PICK ERROR
Make sure that your original contains no more than 30 pages.
Open the ADF
cover
Follow the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
ADF SKEW ERROR
Make sure that the paper guides are aligned on the sides of the originals, and
that all of the originals are the same size.
Follow the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
Authentication
information is
incorrect.
Please re-enter
information.
A user name or password is incorrect. Type the information again.
Authentication
Required
Authentication has been enabled for this feature or destination. A username
and password are required. Contact your network administrator.
Authentication
required to use
this feature
A user name and password are required. Contact your network administrator.
BAD DUPLEXER
CONNECTION
The duplex printing accessory is not connected correctly to the MFP.
BAD OPTIONAL
TRAY CONNECTION
An optional tray is not connected correctly to the MFP.
BAD TRAY 1
CONNECTION
Tray 1 is not connected correctly to the MFP.
<BINNAME> FULL
The specified output bin is full.
Follow the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
Follow the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
Follow the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
Empty the bin to continue printing.
ENWW
Understanding MFP messages 145
Message
Explanation or recommended action
Canceling...
<JOBNAME>
The MFP is cancelling a job. The message continues while the job is stopped,
the paper path is flushed, and any remaining incoming data on the active data
channel is received and discarded.
CARD SLOT X NOT
FUNCTIONAL
The compact flash card in the specified slot is not working correctly.
CARTRIDGE
FAILURE
Return for
Replacement
The cartridge is loaded and the shipping protection strip cannot be fully
removed.
CARTRIDGE OUT
REPLACE
CARTRIDGE
The cartridge does not contain any more toner. Printing cannot continue
because damage to the MFP might result. Replace the print cartridge.
CHECK CABLES
Then turn off
then on
Make sure that the cable between the scanner and the MFP is connected.
CHECK CABLES
CHECK SCANNER
LOCK
To continue turn
off then on
Make sure that the scanner is unlocked and the interface cable is seated
correctly.
CHECK COPY
CONNECT CARD
Make sure that the Copy Connect board on the formatter is firmly in place.
Return the cartridge for a new one. (See Parts and accessories, or go to
www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.)
If the error persists, replace the cable.
Check for LED light activity on the Copy Connect board.
If the problem persists, replace the Copy Connect board.
Check the glass
and remove any
paper, then
press START
A digital send or copy job has been performed from the scanner glass, but the
original document needs to be removed.
Checking paper
path
The MFP rollers are rotating to check for possible jams.
CHOSEN
PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE
To continue
touch OK
A print job requested a MFP language (personality) that does is not available in
this MFP. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory.
CLEANING DISK
<X>% Complete
Do not power
off.
The hard disk or compact flash disk is being cleaned. Contact the network
administrator.
CLOSE FLATBED
COVER DURING
INITIALIZATION
Close the top cover before turning on the MFP.
146 Chapter 10 Problem solving
Print the job by using a driver for a different printer language, or add the
requested language to the MFP (if possible).
ENWW
Message
Explanation or recommended action
CLOSE FRONT OR
LEFT DOOR
To continue turn
off then on
The MFP was turned on with one of these doors open. Close the door, turn the
MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
CLOSE RIGHT DOOR
Close the vertical transfer door.
CLOSE RIGHT DOOR
To continue turn
off then on
The MFP was turned on with the right door open.
CLOSE STAPLE
DOOR
Close the stapler access door on the output paper handling device.
Creating...
CLEANING PAGE
The MFP is generating the cleaning page.
DATA RECEIVED
The MFP has received data but is waiting for a form feed or has been paused.
DIFFERENT PAPER
SIZES IN JOB
Different media sizes are being used for a single job in the multifunction
finisher.
Verify that all pages in the job are configured for the same size paper.
ENWW
Deleting...
The MFP is deleting a stored job.
Digital Send
server is not
responding
Contact
administrator
The MFP cannot communicate with the server. Verify the network connection.
DUPLEXER ERROR
REMOVE DUPLEXER
Install duplexer
with power off
The duplexer has been removed. Reinstall the duplexer.
EIO X DISK NOT
FUNCTIONAL
The EIO hard disk is not working correctly.
E-mail Gateway
did not accept
the job because
the attachment
was too large
The scanned documents have exceeded the size limit of the e-mail server.
Resend the job using a lower resolution, smaller file size setting, or fewer
pages. Contact your network administrator to enable sending the scanned
documents using multiple e-mails.
E-mail Gateway
did not respond
An e-mail gateway has exceeded the time out value. Verify the e-mail address.
Follow the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
Understanding MFP messages 147
Message
Explanation or recommended action
E-mail Gateway
rejected the job
because of the
addressing
information.
Job failed
One or more of the e-mail addresses is incorrect. Send the job again with the
correct addresses.
Event log empty
The user is attempting to view an empty event log by selecting SHOW EVENT LOG
from the control panel.
FINISHING
PROCESS NOT
FUNCTIONAL
For help touch
OK
The external device might not be able to perform the finishing process, but the
device might still pass paper. The print job will be completed unfinished.
FLATBED COVER
OPEN
The ADF cover is open. Close the cover.
Folder list is
full. To add a
folder, you must
first delete a
folder.
The MFP limits the number of folders that can be established. Delete an
unused folder to add a new folder.
Found LDAP
Gateway: <IP
Address>
The MFP has located the listed SMTP gateway on the network. Accept the
address to enable addressing.
Found SMTP
Gateway: <IP
Address>
The MFP has located the listed SMTP gateway on the network. Accept the
address to enable addressing.
Front Side
Optical System
Error
The scanner has experienced an error. Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
[FS] DEVICE
FAILURE
The memory device indicated has failed. Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
If the error persists, replace the memory device.
[FS] FILE
OPERATION FAILED
A PJL file system command was received, but the command was illogical (for
example, a command to download a file to a non-existent directory).
[FS] FILE SYSTEM
IS FULL
A PJL file system command was received to store something on the file
system, but the file system is full.
[FS] IS WRITE
PROTECTED
The file system device is protected. No new files can be written to it.
[FS] NOT
INITIALIZED
The file system has not been initialized
148 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Message
Explanation or recommended action
Gateways failed
The MFP was unable to locate either an SMTP or LDAP server. Verify the
gateway address.
HP Digital
Sending:
Delivery Error
A digital send job has failed and cannot be delivered. Try to send the job again.
INCORRECT
The wrong PIN was typed.
Return to the previous screen and type the PIN again.
ENWW
Initializing...
The MFP is starting up.
INSERT OR
CLOSE TRAY xx
The specified tray must be inserted or closed for printing to continue.
INSTALL
CARTRIDGE
The print cartridge has been removed or has been installed incorrectly. It must
be replaced or reinstalled correctly for printing to continue.
INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY TO LOAD
FONTS/DATA
<DEVICE>
To continue
touch OK
The MFP does not have enough memory to load the data (for example, fonts or
macros) from the location specified. Touch OK to continue without this
information.
INTERNAL DISK
NOT FUNCTIONAL
The internal hard disk has failed. Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
If the message persists, add more memory.
If the message persists, see the HP support flyer or go to www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
LDAP Gateway Not
Responding
The LDAP server is not communicating with the MFP. Verify the LDAP server
address. Contact the network administrator.
LDAP Gateway OK
The LDAP server has responded after exceeding the time out value for an
address request.
LDAP Server is
not responding
Contact
administrator
The LDAP server has exceeded the time out value for an address request.
Verify LDAP server address.
LOAD TRAY xx
To use another
tray touch OK.
The job requires a specific media type and size that is not available.
LOAD TRAY 1
[TYPE][SIZE]
The tray is empty or configured for a different size than the size requested.
Follow the instructions on the pop-up dialog box.
Load the requested media into Tray 1.
Touch OK to use a media type and size that is available in another tray, or follow
the instructions in the on screen dialog box.
Understanding MFP messages 149
Message
Explanation or recommended action
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested media into Tray 1.
To override the message, touch OK if the required media is available in another
tray.
Touch OK to use a type and size that is available in another tray.
Multiple page
scan mode
This message is displayed when using Job Mode to e-mail.
Network
connection
required
For Digital
Sending
Contact
administrator
A digital sending feature has been configured, but a network connection is not
detected. Verify the network connection. Contact your network administrator.
No job to cancel
The STOP button was pressed, but no active job or buffered data is present.
The message is displayed for approximately two seconds before the MFP
returns to the READY state.
Novell Login
Required
Novell authentication has been enabled for this destination. Enter Novell
network credentials to access the digital sending feature.
OUTPUT PAPER
PATH OPEN
The paper path between the MFP and the external finishing device is open.
Close the path to continue printing.
Password or name
is incorrect.
Please enter
correct login.
The user name or password is incorrect or mis typed. Retype the user name
and password.
PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE
The MFP has passed its prescribed printed-page threshold between
maintenance procedures.
To ensure optimum print quality, the MFP prompts you to perform routine
maintenance every 350,000 pages. To order a printer maintenance kit, see
Parts and accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
Performing
upgrade
The MFP is performing a firmware upgrade.
Processing
Cleaning Page
The MFP is generating the cleaning page.
Receiving
Upgrade
The MFP is receiving a firmware upgrade.
REINSERT
DUPLEXER
The duplexer has been removed and must be reinstalled.
150 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
ENWW
Message
Explanation or recommended action
REPLACE
CARTRIDGE
The print cartridge is out of toner and the Cartridge Low=CONTINUE message
appears in the System Setup submenu. Touch OK to continue printing until there
is no more toner.
REPLACE STAPLER
CARTRIDGE
To continue
touch OK
The external paper handling device is out of staples.
REPLACE STAPLES
To continue
touch OK
The external stapling device is out of staples. Install more staples.
Request accepted
please wait
A user requested that the MFP print an internal page. When the current job has
finished, the internal page will be printed.
RESEND UPGRADE
An error exists in the MFP firmware flash. Resend a valid firmware image.
SANITIZING DISK
<X>% COMPLETE
Do not power off
The hard disk or compact flash disk is being cleaned. Contact the network
administrator.
SCAN CARRIAGE
LOCKED
Check lock
switch, cycle
power
The flatbed scanner carriage is locked for shipping. Turn off the MFP, unlock the
scanner carriage, and turn on the MFP.
SIZE MISMATCH IN
TRAY XX
The media in the specified tray is shorter or longer in the feed direction than the
size configured for the tray.
SMTP failed
The SMTP server could not send the job. Verify the e-mail server address.
Contact the network administrator.
SMTP Gateway Not
Responding
The SMTP gateway has exceeded a time out value. Verify the e-mail server
address. Contact the network administrator.
Staple Option No
Longer Available
The stapler does not support the stapling request.
STAPLER ALIGN
ERROR
The paper in the stapler is not aligned. Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
STAPLER LOW
ON STAPLES
The stapler device is running out of staples. Install a new staple cartridge.
STAPLER
INTERRUPTION
Remove the jammed staple.
Understanding MFP messages 151
Message
Explanation or recommended action
TOO MANY PAGES
IN JOB TO FINISH
For help touch
OK
The external device received too many pages to perform the requested
finishing process.
TOO MANY PAGES
IN JOB TO STAPLE
For help touch
OK
The print job is too large to staple. The job will be completed unstapled.
TOO MANY PAGES
TO MAKE BOOKLET
The page content is too large to be saddle stitched.
Verify that the job is within specifications to be saddle stitched. See the User’s
Guide that came with the output device for more information.
UNABLE TO
STORE JOB
A job cannot be stored on the MFP because of a memory, disk, or configuration
problem.
UNSUPPORTED DATA
ON [FS] DIMM IN
SLOT X
The DIMM in the specified slot contains unsupported data.
To clear touch
OK.
Username or
password is
incorrect.
Please re-enter.
The user name or password is incorrect or mis typed. Retype the user name
and password.
Waiting for tray
xx to lift
The tray is lifting the paper to the top of the tray for correct feeding.
Windows Login
Required to use
this feature:
<feature>
Provide Windows network credentials to access the digital sending feature.
10.xx.yy SUPPLY
MEMORY ERROR
The MFP cannot read or write to at least one supply e-label or an e-label is
missing from a supply. Reinstall the supply, or install a new supply.
11.xx Internal
clock error
To continue
touch OK
There is a problem with the MFP’s real time clock. The MFP will prompt the
user to set the date and time whenever the product is turned off, and then
turned on.
13.xx.yz JAM IN
[LOCATION]
Remove jammed media from the specified location (see Clearing jams).
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Open and close the front door to clear the message.
If the message persists after all jams have been cleared, a sensor might be
stuck or broken. Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider (see the
HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp).
152 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Message
Explanation or recommended action
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
The MFP received more data than can fit in its available memory. You might
have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or complex graphics.
To continue
touch OK
Touch OK to print the transferred data (some data might be lost), then simplify
the print job or install additional memory (see MFP memory and expansion).
21 PAGE TOO
COMPLEX
To continue
touch OK
The page formatting process was not fast enough for the MFP.
22 EIO x
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue
touch OK
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x). An improper
communications protocol might be in use.
22 Embedded I/O
Buffer Overflow
To continue
touch OK
Too much data was sent to the embedded HP Jetdirect.
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue
touch OK
Too much data was sent to the parallel port.
Touch OK to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)
If this message appears often, simplify the print job.
Touch OK to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)
Check the host configuration. If this message persists, contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP support flyer, or go to
www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.)
Touch OK to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
Check for a loose cable connection, and be sure to use a high-quality cable.
Some non-HP parallel cables might be missing pin connections or might
otherwise not conform to the IEEE-1284 specification. (See Parts and
accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/
lj9050mfp).
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
30.00.yy SCANNER
FAILURE
Make sure that the scanner is unlocked.
Check the cables.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
30.00.01 SCANNER
I/O FAILURE
CHECK CABLES
THEN TRUN OFF
THEN ON
ENWW
The MFP and the copy processor are not communicating. Check for a
disconnected cable.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
Understanding MFP messages 153
Message
Explanation or recommended action
30.00.02 SCANNER
I/O FAILURE
CHECK COPY
CONNECT CARD
Make sure that the scanner is unlocked.
Check the cables.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
40 EIO x BAD
TRANSMISSION
To continue
touch OK
The connection between the MFP and the EIO card in the specified slot has
been broken.
40 EMBEDDED I/O
BAD TRANSMISSION
To continue
touch OK
The connection with the embedded HP Jetdirect print server has been broken.
41.x ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred.
To continue
touch OK
Turn the MFP off, then turn the MFP on.
41.3 UNEXPECTED
SIZE IN TRAY xx
To use another
tray touch OK
Touch OK to clear the error message and continue printing.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
A tray (xx) is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction
than the size configured for the tray.
Touch OK to get to TRAY xx SIZE=. Reconfigure the size in a tray so the MFP will
use a tray with the size required for the print job.
If the error does not clear, turn the MFP off, then turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
49.xxxxx
ERROR
A critical firmware error has occurred.
To continue turn
off then on
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
50.x FUSER ERROR
A fuser error has occurred.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
51.xy
ERROR
A temporary printing error has occurred.
To continue turn
off then on
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
154 Chapter 10 Problem solving
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
ENWW
Message
Explanation or recommended action
52.x
ERROR
A temporary printing error has occurred.
To continue turn
off then on
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
53.xy.zz
CHECK RAM DIMM
SLOT X
A problem exists with the MFP memory. The DIMM that caused the error will
not be used. The following are the values of x:
To continue
touch OK
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
x = Device location
0 = Onboard memory
1 = Slot 1
2 = Slot 2
You might need to reseat or replace the specified DIMM.
Turn the MFP off, and then replace the DIMM that caused the error.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
55.xx.yy DC
CONTROLLER ERROR
The communication link between the formatter and the DC controller was lost.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
To continue turn
off then on
56.xy
ERROR
A temporary printing error has occurred.
To continue turn
off then on
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
57.xy
ERROR
To continue turn
off then on
A temporary printing error has occurred.
58.xy
ERROR
To continue turn
off then on
ENWW
Turn the MFP off, then turn the MFP on.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
A temporary printing error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off, then turn the MFP on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
59.xy
ERROR
A temporary printing error has occurred.
To continue turn
off then on
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
Understanding MFP messages 155
Message
Explanation or recommended action
62
NO SYSTEM
A problem exists with the MFP firmware.
To continue turn
off then on
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
64
ERROR
A scan buffer error occurred.
To continue turn
off then on
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
68.x PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
The MFP NVRAM is full. Some settings saved in the NVRAM might have been
reset to the factory defaults.
To continue
touch OK
Printing can continue, but some unexpected functions might occur if an error
occurred in permanent storage.
To continue, turn off the MFP, and then the MFP on.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
Touch OK to clear the message.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
68.x PERMANENT
STORAGE WRITE
FAIL
The MFP NVRAM is failing to write.
To continue
touch OK
Touch OK to clear the message.
69.xy
ERROR
To continue turn
off then on
Printing can continue, but some unexpected functions might occur if an error
occurred in permanent storage.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the MFP off, reseat the duplex printing accessory, and then turn the MFP
on.
If this message persists, remove the duplex unit and resume single-sided
printing. If this message continues to persist, contact an HP-authorized service
or support provider (see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
79
ERROR
A critical hardware error occurred.
To continue turn
off then on
If the message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider
(see the HP support flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp).
8x.yyyy EIO
ERROR
The EIO accessory card in slot x has encountered a critical error, as specified
by yyyy.
8x.yyyy EMBEDDED
JETDIRECT ERROR
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has encountered a critical error, as
specified by yyyy.
156 Chapter 10 Problem solving
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
ENWW
Correcting output quality problems
The first step in correcting output quality problems is to determine if the image defect is present
when copying and printing, or only when copying. If the image defect is present only when
copying, see Cleaning the ADF delivery system.
If the image defect is present only when printing, use the examples in the image defect table to
determine which print quality problem you are experiencing, and then see the corresponding
reference pages to troubleshoot the problem.
Note
ENWW
The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the MFP long-edge first.
(If the paper has passed through the MFP short-edge first, lines and repeating defects will run
vertically rather than horizontally.)
See Light print or
fade
See Specks
See Gray
background
See Toner smear
See Dropouts
See Loose
toner
See Lines
See Repeating
defects
Correcting output quality problems 157
See Misformed
characters
See Page skew
See Curl or
wave
See Wrinkles or
creases
Light print or fade
●
The print cartridge might be low. Replace the print cartridge.
●
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies status page (see
Supplies status page). If maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit.
(See Parts and accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp.)
Specks
Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
●
If specks occur frequently, set your MFP up to automatically run a cleaning page (see Using
the MFP cleaning page).
●
Clean the inside of the MFP and run a manual cleaning page to clean the fuser (see
Cleaning the MFP and Using the MFP cleaning page).
●
Try using a different type of paper.
●
Check for print cartridge leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it.
Dropouts
●
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met (see
Environmental specifications).
●
If the paper is rough and the toner easily rubs off, either try changing the fuser mode to
High 1 or High 2, or try using a smoother paper.
●
Try using a different paper type.
Lines
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
●
Clean the inside of the MFP and run a manual cleaning page to clean the fuser (see
Cleaning the MFP and Using the MFP cleaning page).
●
Replace the print cartridge.
●
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies status page (see
Supplies status page). If maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit.
(See the Parts and accessories or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp.)
158 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Gray background
●
Do not use paper that has already been run through the MFP.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
●
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°.
●
At the MFP control panel, use the PRINT QUALITY menu to decrease the toner density setting
(see Print quality submenu).
●
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met (see
Environmental specifications).
●
Replace the print cartridge.
Toner smear
Also see Loose toner.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
●
Try using a different type of paper.
●
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met.
●
Clean the inside of the MFP and run a manual cleaning page to clean the fuser (see
Cleaning the MFP and Using the MFP cleaning page).
●
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies status page (see
Supplies status page). If maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit.
(See Parts and accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp.)
●
Replace the print cartridge.
Loose toner
Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page.
●
Make sure that the fuser levers are down.
●
If paper is heavy or rough, try using a high fuser mode so that toner fuses more completely
onto the paper. At the control panel, use FUSER MODES menu in the PRINT QUALITY submenu
(see Print quality submenu).
●
If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your paper, try printing on the
smoother side.
●
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met (see
Environmental specifications).
●
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications (see Specifications).
●
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies status page (see
Supplies status page). If maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit.
(See Parts and accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp.)
Repeating defects
ENWW
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
●
If the distance between defects is 38 mm (1.5 inches) or 94 mm (3.8 inches), the print
cartridge might need to be replaced.
●
Clean the inside of the MFP and run a manual cleaning page to clean the fuser (see
Cleaning the MFP and Using the MFP cleaning page).
●
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies status page (see
Supplies status page). If maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit.
(See Parts and accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp.)
Correcting output quality problems 159
Misformed characters
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
●
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met (see
Environmental specifications).
●
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the supplies status page (see
Supplies status page). If maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit.
(See Parts and accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/
support/lj9050mfp.)
Page skew
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
●
Verify that there are no torn pieces of media inside the MFP.
●
Make sure that the media is loaded correctly, all adjustments have been made, and the
paper is under the corner tabs (see Orienting media).
●
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also, try rotating the media 180°.
●
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications (see Specifications).
●
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met (see
Environmental specifications).
Curl or wave
●
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also, try rotating the media 180°.
●
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications (see Specifications).
●
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met (see
Environmental specifications).
●
Try printing to a different output bin.
●
If media is lightweight and smooth, try using a low fuser mode to reduce the heat in the
fusing process. At the control panel, use FUSER MODEs menu on the PRINT QUALITY
submenu to do this (see Print quality submenu).
Wrinkles or creases
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
●
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the MFP are being met (see
Environmental specifications).
●
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also, try rotating the media 180°.
●
Make sure that the media is loaded correctly, all adjustments have been made, and the
media is under the corner tabs (see Orienting media).
●
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications (see Specifications).
●
If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat.
160 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Preventing wrinkles on envelopes
If envelopes are wrinkled when printed, first ensure that you are using supported types of
envelopes. Then, use the following procedure to move the fuser levers to the higher position
while printing the envelopes.
To prevent wrinkles on envelopes
See Printing on envelopes for more information.
Detecting MFP problems
Troubleshooting checklist
Note
●
Ensure that all of the sheets in the document that is loaded into the ADF are of the same size
and that the document does not exceed the maximum stack height for the ADF.
●
Ensure that media that is loaded into the trays is from a freshly opened ream, is free of
defects, and is installed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are adjusted correctly.
●
Verify that the MFP is using a dedicated circuit and is directly plugged into the outlet. (Do not
use a power strip or extension cord.)
For more information about the HP output devices, see the User’s Guide that came with the device.
Determining MFP problems
ENWW
Situation/Message
Solution
Display is blank, and
internal fans are not
running.
Make sure that the MFP power is on. Press all the keys to see if one is
stuck. Contact your HP-authorized service representative if these
steps do not work.
Messages appear on the
display.
See Understanding MFP messages.
Paper is jammed in the
MFP.
Check for paper jams (see Clearing jams).
MFP display shows the
wrong language or displays
unfamiliar characters.
Reconfigure the control-panel display language. Touch Menu, then
touch Configure Device. Touch System Setup, then touch Language.
Touch your language, and then touch OK.
MFP is not working at all.
Plug the power cord firmly into the grounded power receptacle and into
the MFP. (Be sure the power source is energized.)
MFP is turned on, but
internal fans are not
running.
Make sure the line voltage is correct for the MFP power configuration.
(See the plate next to the power receptacle on the back of your MFP
for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip and its voltage
is not within specification, plug the MFP directly into the power
receptacle.
MFP voltage is not correct.
Make sure line voltage is in the correct range. (See the MFP label next
to the power receptacle on the back of the MFP for voltage
requirements.)
Detecting MFP problems 161
Situation/Message
Solution
An error occurs during a
Digital Send job. Job failed.
The MFP experienced an error while executing the digital sending job.
The administrator should check on the status of the SMTP server.
The e-mail gateway could
not accept the job because
the attachment is too large.
Try using a different file format or sending the document a few pages at
a time.
Network connection
required for digital sending
The MFP cannot find a network connection. The administrator should
check to see if the MFP is connected to the network.
162 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Software, computer, and product interface problems
Situation
Solution
A page fails to print.
Set PRINT PS ERRORS=ON, and then send the job again to print a PS
error page. If this does not identify the problem, try turning off
Resource Saving and I/O Buffering or try installing more memory
(see PCL or PS font list).
A page prints with clipped
margins.
If the page margins are clipped, you might have to print the page at
300-dpi resolution or install more memory. Also try turning off
Resource Saving and I/O Buffering.
A PS error page prints.
●
●
●
●
●
●
A text listing of PS
commands prints instead of
your PS print job.
The control panel PERSONALITY=AUTO setting might have been
confused by a nonstandard PS code. Check the PERSONALITY setting
to see if it is set to PS or PCL. If it is set to PCL, set it to
PERSONALITY=AUTO. If it is set to AUTO, set it to PS for this print job only.
When the job has printed, return the setting to AUTO.
Attempted to use a
disk-resident font, but the
MFP substituted a different
font.
If you are using PCL, print the PCL Font Page, and verify that the font
is on the disk. If you are using PS, print the PS Font Page and make
sure that the font is on the disk. If the font is not on the disk, use the
Device Storage Manager or the Macintosh-based HP LaserJet utility to
download the font.
Auto setup did not
automatically set up the
MFP.
●
●
●
●
Blank pages print.
●
●
Cannot access Tray 2 or 3,
or Tray 4.
ENWW
Make sure the print job is a PS job.
Check to see whether your program expected you to send a setup
or PS header file to the MFP.
Check the MFP setup in your software application to make sure
that the MFP is selected.
Check cable connections to ensure that they are secure.
Reduce the complexity of the graphic.
Add available memory by turning on Resource Saving.
Set up the MFP manually by selecting Configure.
Select an alternate PPD (See Communicating by using an optional
HP Jetdirect print server).
The PPD might have been renamed. If so, select the renamed
PPD (See Communicating by using an optional HP Jetdirect print
server).
A network queue might be present.
Turn the MFP off and then back on.
Make sure the print cartridge is installed properly.
Make sure that the tray guides are adjusted correctly for the paper size
you are using (see Loading input trays).
Software, computer, and product interface problems 163
Situation
Solution
Computer software
problem.
Check that your computer is working correctly by printing from a
program you know works, or by printing a plain text file to see if the
problem is with your program or with your driver. (For example,
C:\dir>LPTn where n is the number of the computer port the MFP is
connected to, for example LPT1.) To print the page, you might have to
send a form feed command from your computer.
Control-panel settings,
such as RESOLUTION or
ORIENTATION, do not work
or are ignored.
Software commands override control-panel settings (see Using control
panel menus for information about how your program works with
control panel settings).
Data from a previous print
job is still in the MFP buffer.
●
●
●
●
●
Data is missing, but there
are no MFP messages.
●
●
●
●
Data light is flashing, but
nothing prints.
●
●
●
●
●
Make sure that you are using the correct driver.
A complex print job might still be processing.
Make sure the MFP is not paused. Make sure the control panel
reads PROCESSING JOB. If the MFP is paused, press START to
resume printing.
Pull out the print cartridge and check for jammed media. Reseat
the print cartridge.
Open Trays 2 and 3. Make sure that the appropriate media is
inserted (see Media specifications). Close the trays.
Check your software application to be sure the print file contains
no errors.
Check your cable to make sure it is securely connected to both the
MFP and the computer.
Your parallel cable might be defective. Use a high-quality cable.
(See Parts and accessories or go to www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for an HP cable part
number.)
Check your network connection.
Make sure that you are using the correct driver.
A complex print job might still be processing.
Make sure the MFP is not paused. Make sure the control panel
reads PROCESSING JOB.
Pull out the print cartridge and check for jammed media. Reseat
the print cartridge.
Open Trays 2 and 3. Make sure that the appropriate media is
loaded (see Media specifications). Close the trays.
Driver might not be set up
to print on both sides of the
paper.
Make sure that the option to print on both sides of the paper is properly
configured in the driver.
Duplex printing accessory
jams.
Make sure that you are using the supported paper weights and sizes
(see Media specifications).
First page takes much
longer to print than
following pages.
●
164 Chapter 10 Problem solving
●
Make sure that the MFP displays READY.
Set the Sleep feature for a longer time period (See Configuration
page). If a page takes longer to print due to complex formatting
commands, changing the Sleep setting might not improve print
speed. You might want to simplify the page.
ENWW
Situation
Solution
Garbled pages print, there
are overprints, or only a
portion of a page prints.
●
●
●
●
●
General repeated staplerjam problems.
●
●
Job has incorrect fonts.
●
●
Check to see that the job to be stapled is less than 5 mm (0.1 inch)
thick.
Stapler might have some trapped staple wires that are obstructing
the magazine. Remove loose staples and paper dust from the
inside of the stapler (see To clear a staple jam from the stacker/
stapler).
If you are printing an .EPS file, try downloading the fonts contained
in the .EPS file to the MFP before printing. Use the HP LaserJet
Utility (See Software for Macintosh computers).
If the document is not printing with New York, Geneva, or Monaco
fonts, go into the Page Setup dialog box, and select Options to
change the font.
Job is not sent to the
appropriate product.
Another product with the same or similar name might have received
the print job. Make sure that the MFP name matches the name
selected in the Chooser (see Communicating by using an optional
HP Jetdirect print server).
Job prints in Courier (the
MFP default font) instead of
the font you requested.
●
●
●
●
Job prints on the wrong
side of the paper.
●
●
●
ENWW
Make sure that your program is configured for the correct MFP.
Replace the interface (I/O) cable with a cable you know works to
see if the cable is defective.
Your parallel cable might be defective. Use a high-quality cable.
(See Parts and accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for an HP cable part
number.)
Set the PERSONALITY item in the Configuration menu to AUTO (See
PERSONALITY=AUTO). The MFP might have been set to PCL, and a
PS job was sent to the MFP, or vice versa.
Data sent to the MFP might be corrupt. Try sending another file to
see if it prints.
The requested typeface is not available in the MFP or is not
present on the disk. Use a font download utility to download the
required font.
Fonts downloaded to memory are lost when the MFP is turned off.
They are also lost if Resource Saving is not used, and a
personality switch is performed to print a PCL job. Disk fonts are
not affected by PCL jobs or by turning the MFP off.
Print a PS Font Page to verify that the font is available. If a disk font
appears to be missing, it might be because a software utility was
used to delete the font, because the disk was reinitialized, or
because the disk drive is not installed correctly. Print a
configuration page to verify that the disk drive is installed and is
functioning correctly.
Print a Disk Directory to help identify available fonts.
Make sure you have loaded the paper correctly. (See Loading input
trays.)
If you are printing one-sided copies, load paper into Tray 1 with the
side to be printed facing up. Load paper in Trays 2, 3, and Tray 4
with the side to be printed facing down.
If you are printing two-sided copies, load paper in Trays 2, 3, and
Tray 4 with the first side to be printed facing up.
Software, computer, and product interface problems 165
Situation
Solution
Job was not duplexed.
●
●
●
Job was not stapled.
Print a configuration page to ensure that the duplex printing
accessory is installed correctly (see Configuration page).
Make sure the duplex printing accessory has been configured in
the driver.
Make sure that the software is not overriding the driver setting.
Jobs sent to the stapler might not be stapled for one or more of the
following reasons:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
One-page jobs will not be stapled.
The stapler is out of staples and AUTO CONTINUE is set to ON.
The wrong size or type of paper was used for the job.
More than 50 pages were sent to the stapler, exceeding its
capacity.
The stapler has bent or broken staples in the stapler head.
A staple jam was recently cleared (up to two sequential jobs might
not be stapled).
The job was sent to a bin other than the stapler bin because the
wrong size or type of paper was used for the job.
The interface cable to the stapler unit might be defective or not
connected properly.
Job went to a different
location than was expected.
The wrong size or type of paper was used for the job. (See Media
specifications.)
Last page did not print and
the Data light is on.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Make sure that you are using the correct driver.
Complex print job might still be processing.
MFP might be waiting for the end of a file that did not come with
the job. Touch Continue to send it.
Make sure the MFP is not paused. Make sure the control panel
reads PROCESSING JOB.
Pull out the print cartridge and check for jammed media. Reseat
the print cartridge.
Open Trays 2 and 3. Make sure that the appropriate paper is
loaded. (See Media specifications.) Close the trays.
Network or shared printer
problems.
Check for network or shared printer problems by connecting your
computer directly to the MFP and printing from a program you know
works. If you suspect network problems, check with your system
administrator or consult the network documentation that came with
your network cards.
Tray 4 will not work.
The power cord is not firmly plugged in to both the MFP and the power
receptacle. Remove and reconnect the power cord.
The printed page is not
going to the correct output
location.
●
166 Chapter 10 Problem solving
●
Verify that the correct output bin is selected in the driver. For more
information about changing driver settings, see the online help.
The media does not meet the specifications for the output bin (see
Media specifications).
ENWW
Situation
Solution
Jams and paper-feeding
problems occur.
●
●
●
●
MFP does not recognize
the duplex printing
accessory.
●
●
●
Print a configuration page to ensure that the duplex printing
accessory is installed properly (see Configuration page).
Turn the MFP off. Remove and reinstall the unit. Turn the MFP on.
Make sure that the duplex printing accessory has been configured
in the driver.
MFP does not recognize
the hard disk.
Turn the MFP off and verify that the hard disk is inserted correctly and
is securely fastened.
MFP does not recognize
Tray 4.
●
●
●
●
Make sure you selected Tray 4 in the driver (see Helpful software
for increased flexibility).
Turn the MFP off and then on again.
Make sure the power cord is plugged into Tray 4.
If the MFP still does not recognize Tray 4, contact your dealer or
authorized HP service provider.
MFP does not recognize
stapler.
Check the cable to the stapler. Make sure it is properly connected at
both ends.
MFP draws media from the
wrong tray.
●
●
●
●
ENWW
See To clear jams in Trays 2 and 3 or To clear jams in Tray 4.
Ensure that the media specifications are within recommended
range. (See Media specifications.)
Make sure the paper guides are adjusted properly and are not
skewed. (See Loading input trays.)
Perform preventive maintenance if requested by the MFP.
Be sure your program is selecting the correct paper size or type.
Make sure that the driver for your program is correctly installed,
configured, and capable of requesting the required paper size and
type.
The size of media requested is not loaded in the tray selected. The
MFP draws media from the next default tray that contains the
correct size. Load the correct media in the tray and make sure the
tray is adjusted correctly. Load the tray with enough media to
complete the print job.
If you selected Tray 2, 3, or Tray 4 and did not turn the MFP off
when installing it, the MFP does not recognize it and draws paper
from the next default tray source. Turn the MFP off, and then on
again, and the MFP will recognize the tray.
MFP interface problems.
Print a configuration page from the control panel to verify that the
interface configurations shown on the printout match those on the host
computer (see Configuration page).
MFP is off or not connected
to an active power source.
Make sure that all power cables are firmly plugged in to both the MFP
components and an active power source. Make sure the MFP is on.
Software, computer, and product interface problems 167
Situation
Solution
MFP is ready, but not
receiving data (the Data
light does not blink).
●
●
●
●
MFP is usually slow to
respond.
●
●
Check for loose I/O cable connections at the MFP and computer or
network port.
Try your I/O cable on a system that you know works.
Check that the correct interface cable was selected and is securely
connected to both the MFP and the computer. If the cable is not
correctly configured, see the start guide for configuration
information.
If connected to a network, print a Jetdirect configuration page to
check for interface or network problems (See Configuration page).
MFP speed is highly dependent on how your software application
is set up, which driver you are using, and how much traffic is on the
network. See the start for configuration information.
You might need to add more memory (see Installing memory).
MFP port problem.
Check that your computer port is configured and working correctly.
One way to check this is to connect another MFP to that port on your
computer and print from a program you know works.
MFP prints wrong fonts or
formats.
●
●
Printing stops in the middle
of the job.
●
●
●
●
●
The font is not present in the MFP and must be downloaded from
your program, or the proper font DIMM must be installed. Check
your program to make sure the correct driver has been installed
and configured. To verify that the font you want is available, print a
PS or PCL font list (see Information menu).
Your software selected a substitute font for one that is not available
in the MFP. (See your software program manual for more
information about font selection.)
Check the control-panel display for an error message.
If you are on a network, make sure the computer is correctly
configured and that there is not a network problem (see your
system administrator).
Check the line voltage to make sure that it is steady and within
MFP specifications. (See Power requirements.) Turn the MFP off
and then back on.
Check the time-out setting in your network application. You might
need to increase it.
If you are trying to copy a file to the MFP from the DOS prompt,
use the copy command COPY [filename] LPTn /B printer
port, such as LPT1 (where n is the port number).
Note
To output the page, you might have to send a form feed command from
the computer.
PS print job will not print
from a Macintosh computer.
Check the configuration in the PostScript tab of Windows. Check that
Protocol is set to AppleTalk and that Binary Data is not selected.
Software is selecting the
wrong port.
Check your operating system port settings to be sure the print job is
being sent to the correct port (for example, LPT1).
168 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Situation
Solution
The Macintosh computer is
not communicating with the
MFP.
●
●
●
●
●
●
The driver icon does not
appear in the Chooser.
ENWW
●
Make sure the control panel displays READY.
Make sure the correct driver is selected in the left half of the
Chooser. Then make sure that the required MFP name is selected
(highlighted) on the right half of the Chooser. There will be an icon
next to the MFP name after the driver has been set up and
configured with the PPD.
If the MFP resides on a network with multiple zones, make sure
the correct zone is selected in the AppleTalk Zones box in the
Chooser.
Make sure the correct MFP has been selected in the Chooser by
printing a configuration page (see Configuration page). Make sure
the name of the MFP displayed on the configuration page matches
the MFP in the Chooser.
Make sure AppleTalk is active. (Select this in the Chooser or in
the AppleTalk control panel, whichever is applicable for your OS
version.)
Make sure the computer and MFP are on the same network. From
Control Panels in the Apple menu, select the Network (or the
AppleTalk) control panel and then choose the correct network (for
example, LocalTalk or EtherTalk).
Make sure the Apple LaserWriter 8 Chooser extension resides in
the Extensions folder. If it is not present anywhere on your system,
you can obtain the driver from your Macintosh OS system software
CD, from Apple Computer, Inc., or see the HP support flyer, or go
to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/
lj9050mfp.
Software, computer, and product interface problems 169
Communicating by using an optional HP Jetdirect print server
If you purchase an optional HP Jetdirect internal print server, and you cannot communicate with
the MFP over the network, check the operation of the print server. Check the
Jetdirect configuration page for the message I/O CARD READY.
To print a configuration page
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Information.
3
Touch Configuration Page.
For troubleshooting information, see the documentation that came with the print server.
Communicating by using the HP Jetdirect embedded print
server
The HP LaserJet 9040mfp and the HP LaserJet 9050mfp have an embedded print server. If you
cannot communicate with the MFP over the network, check the operation of the embedded print
server. Check the embedded Jetdirect configuration page for the message I/O CARD READY, and
for the correct network configuration settings. See To print a configuration page for instructions.
Verify that the print server was able to link to the network automatically:
●
Check that a link LED on the MFP’s LAN (RJ-45) connector is lit, which indicates a
successful link. A link failure is indicated when both LEDs are off.
●
Check the embedded Jetdirect configuration page for error messages. The message LOSS
OF CARRIER ERROR indicates a link failure.
For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually
configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the MFP control-panel menus
(MENU, CONFIGURE DEVICE, I/O, EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU, LINK SPEED).
Note
HP Jetdirect print servers are available for many different network connections, including
802.11 wireless networks.
170 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Checking the MFP configuration
From the control panel, you can print pages that give details about the MFP and its current
configuration. The following information pages are described here:
●
Menu map
●
Configuration page
●
Jetdirect page
●
Supplies status page
●
Usage page
●
PCL or PS font list
●
File directory page
●
Event log
Use the following procedure to print these information pages. Then, see the specific sections
below for more information about each page.
To print an information page
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Information.
3
Scroll to the information page you want and touch the appropriate page.
Menu map
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the control panel, print a control
panel menu map:
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Information.
3
Touch Print Menu Map.
Many of these values can be overridden from the driver or program. You might want to store the
menu map near the MFP for reference.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the MFP.
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see Control panel menus. To
change a control panel setting, see Control panel menus.
ENWW
Checking the MFP configuration 171
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current MFP settings, to help troubleshoot MFP problems, or
to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), trays, and printer
languages.
Note
If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, an HP Jetdirect configuration page also prints.
The configuration page contains the following information:
Note
1
1
4
1
2
1
5
1
3
1
6
1
Device Information lists the serial number, page counts, and other information for the MFP.
2
Event Log lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number of entries viewable,
and the last three entries. The second page of the event log is the manufacturer page. This
page contains information that might assist HP Customer Care representatives in solving
possible MFP problems.
3
Installed Personalities and Options lists all MFP languages that are installed (such as
PCL and PS), and lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot.
4
Memory lists the MFP memory information, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O
buffering and Resource Saving information.
5
Security lists the status of the control panel lock, control panel password, and disk drive.
6
Paper Trays and Options lists the size settings for all trays and lists paper-handling
accessories that are installed.
Numbers in the sample printout match the numbers in the MFP messages. (See the HP support
flyer, or go to www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp. The content of
the configuration page varies, depending on the options that are currently installed in the MFP.
172 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Jetdirect page
The second page to be printed under Configuration is the Jetdirect page, which contains the
following information:
1
2
3
ENWW
1
HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates the MFP status, model number, hardware firmware
version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and
manufactured date.
2
Network Status indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets
received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit
collisions, and transmit late collisions.
3
Protocol Information indicates the status for TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Novell/NetWare, AppleTalk,
and DLC/LLC.
Checking the MFP configuration 173
Supplies status page
Use the supplies status page to obtain information about the toner cartridge installed in the MFP,
the amount of toner left in the toner cartridge, and the number of pages and jobs that have been
processed. The page also lets you know when you should schedule the next preventative
maintenance.
The supplies status page contains the following information:
1
3
2
4
1
Cartridge Information indicates the amount of toner available in the print cartridge,
estimated pages remaining for the amount of toner left in the cartridge, total number of
pages and jobs processed, print cartridge manufacture date and serial number, and how to
recycle HP print cartridges.
2
Device Information lists total MFP page count, preventative maintenance interval, pages
until next maintenance should be performed, and serial number of the MFP.
3
Other Supplies Information indicates the percentage of the maintenance kit has been used
and the HP part numbers.
4
Ordering Information provides information about how to order supplies.
174 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Usage page
Use the usage page to obtain information about the page sizes and number of pages printed,
copied, and sent.
The usage page contains the following information:
HP LaserJet 9050mfp series
1
Usage Page (S/N XXXXXXXXXX)
1
2
3
1
Product Name and Device name indicate the series of HP LaserJet MFP in use.
2
Usage Totals indicates types of pages that have been printed, copied, and scanned; the
number of single-sided pages printed, copied and scanned; the number of duplexed pages
printed, copied and scanned; and the total number of pages printed, copied and scanned.
3
Coverage indicates the average amount of toner used on all pages printed.
PCL or PS font list
Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the MFP. (The font lists also show
which fonts are resident on a hard disk or flash DIMM.)
The PS font list shows the PS fonts installed, and gives a sample of those fonts. The following
describes the information that can be found on the PCL font list:
●
Font gives the font names and samples.
●
Pitch/Point indicates the pitch and point size of the font.
●
Escape Sequence (a PCL 5e programming command) is used to select the designated font.
(See the legend at the bottom of the font list page.)
●
Font # is the number used to select fonts from the control panel (not the software
application). Do not confuse the font # with the font ID (see the following information). The
number indicates the DIMM slot where the font is stored.
• SOFT: Downloaded fonts that stay resident in the MFP until other fonts are downloaded to
replace them or until the MFP is turned off.
• INTERNAL: Fonts that permanently reside in the MFP.
●
ENWW
Font ID is the number you assign to soft fonts when you download them through software.
Checking the MFP configuration 175
Event log page
The first page of the event log contains the following information:
1
2
5
6
3
4
1
Current Page Count indicates the number of pages printed from the MFP.
2
Number indicates the order in which the events occurred. The last event to occur has the
highest number.
3
Event indicates the internal event code for each event.
4
Page Count indicates the number of pages printed from the MFP when the event occurred.
5
Serial Number indicates the serial number of the MFP.
6
Description or Personality indicates whether the event occurred due to a problem within a
MFP personality or due to a MFP jam.
The second page of the event log is the manufacturing page. This page contains information that
might assist HP Customer Care representatives in solving possible MFP problems.
To print an event log
1
Touch Menu.
2
Scroll to and touch Diagnostics.
3
Scroll to and touch Print Event Log.
176 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
Printing a paper path test
The paper path test can be used to verify that various paper paths are working properly or to
troubleshoot problems with tray configuration.
To print a paper path test
ENWW
1
Touch Menu.
2
Scroll to and touch Diagnostics.
3
Scroll to and touch Paper Path Test.
4
Scroll to select the input tray you want to test, the output bin, the duplex printing accessory (if
available), and number of copies, touching OK after you set the value for each. After selecting
the last option, the paper path test automatically starts.
Checking the MFP configuration 177
178 Chapter 10 Problem solving
ENWW
A
Specifications
Overview
This section presents some of the product specifications.
ENWW
●
Paper weight equivalence table
●
Media specifications
●
Environmental specifications
Overview 179
Paper weight equivalence table
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent basis weight in weight specifications other
than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper
in U.S. cover weight, locate the bond weight (in row two, first column) and scan across the row to
the cover weight (in the third column). The equivalent is 75 g/m2 (28 lb).
Note
Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade.
U.S.
Bond
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Text/
Book
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Cover
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Bristol
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Index
Weight
(lb)
U.S. Tag
Weight
(lb)
Metric
Weight
(g/m2)
17
43
24
29
35
39
64
20
50
28
34
42
46
75
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
22
56
31
38
46
51
81
24
60
33
41
50
55
90
27
68
37
45
55
61
100
28
70
39
49
58
65
105
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
34
86
47
58
71
79
128
36
91
50
62
75
83
135
39
100
55
67
82
91
148
42
107
58
72
87
97
157
43
110
60
74
90
100
163
47
119
65
80
97
108
176
53
134
74
90
110
122
199
58
146
80
98
120
133
216
180 Appendix A Specifications
ENWW
Printing supplies
Item
Part
number
Description or use
Print cartridge
C8543X
average of 30,000 pages at 5% coverage
Replacement HP maximum capacity, smart
print cartridge.
HP LaserJet Monochrome
Transparencies
Specifically engineered for use with
HP LaserJet monochrome printers.
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches), 50 sheets/box
92296T
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets/box
92296U
HP LaserJet Soft Gloss Paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches), 50 sheets/box
C4179A
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets/box
C4179B
Specifications: 4.3 mil thickness. Two-sided
coating.
For use with HP Color LaserJet and
HP LaserJet monochrome printers. Coated
paper, good for business documents with high
impact, such as brochures, sales material, and
documents with graphics and photographic
images.
Specifications: 32 lb. Two-sided satin gloss
coating.
HP Premium Choice LaserJet Paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches), 500 sheets/
ream, 10-ream carton
HPU1132
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream,
4-ream carton
CHP410
Tabloid (11 x 17 inches), 250 sheets/
ream, 6-ream carton
HPU1732
A3 (420 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream,
4-ream carton
CHP420
HP LaserJet Paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPJ1124
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches), 3-hole,
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPJ113H
Legal (8.5 x 14 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPJ1424
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream,
5-ream carton
CHP310
Tabloid (11 x 17 in), 500 sheets/ream,
5-ream carton
HPJ1724
HP Printing Paper
ENWW
For use with HP Color LaserJet and
HP LaserJet monochrome printers. A heavy,
super-bright paper for high-impact documents
such as resumes, brochures, reports, and
presentations.
Specifications: 98 bright, 32 lb.
Enhances performance for all HP LaserJet
printers. Heavier for letterhead, high-value
memos, legal documents, direct mail, and
correspondence.
Specifications: 96 bright, 24 lb.
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPP1122
For use with laser and inkjet printers. Created
especially for small offices and home offices.
Heavier and brighter than copier paper.
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream,
5-ream carton
CHP210
Specifications: 92 bright, 22 lb.
A3 (420 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream,
5-ream carton
CHP220
Paper weight equivalence table 181
Printing supplies
Item
Part
number
HP MultiPurpose Paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPM1120
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton
HPM115R
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches), 3-hole,
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPM113H
Legal (8.5 x 14 inches), 500 sheets/
ream, 10-ream carton
HPM1420
Tabloid (11 x 17 inches), 500 sheets/
ream, 5-ream carton
HPM1720
HP Office Paper
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPC8511
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches), 3-hole,
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPC3HP
Legal (8.5 x 14 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPC8514
A4 (210 x 297 mm),
500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton
CHP110
Tabloid (11 x 17 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton
HPC1117
HP Office Recycled Paper
Description or use
For use with all office equipment (laser and
inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines).
Created for businesses that want one paper
for all their office needs. Brighter and
smoother than other office papers.
Specifications: 90 bright, 20 lb.
For use with all office equipment (laser and
inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines).
Good for standard, high-volume printing.
Brighter than standard papers.
Specifications: 87 bright, 20 lb.
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPE1120
For use with all office equipment (laser and
inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines).
Good for high-volume printing.
Letter (8.5 x 11 inches), 3-hole,
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPE113H
Satisfies U.S. Executive Order 13101 for
environmentally preferable products.
Legal (8.5 x 14 inches),
500 sheets/ream, 10-ream carton
HPE1420
Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb,
30% post-consumer content.
182 Appendix A Specifications
ENWW
Media specifications
HP LaserJet products produce excellent print quality. This MFP accepts a variety of media, such
as cut-sheet paper (including recycled paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies, and
custom-size paper. Properties such as weight, grain, and moisture content are important factors
affecting product performance and output quality.
The MFP can use a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in
this manual. Paper that does not meet these guidelines can cause the following problems:
●
poor print quality
●
increased jams and multiple-sheet feeds
●
premature wear on the MFP, requiring repair
For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media. Hewlett-Packard cannot recommend
the use of other brands. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence or control their
quality.
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this manual and still not produce
satisfactory results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and
humidity levels, or other variables over which HP has no control.
Before purchasing a large quantity of media, make sure it meets the requirements specified in
this guide and in the Guidelines for Paper and Other Print Media guide. Always test media before
purchasing a large quantity. For more information, see www.hp.com/go/ljpaper.
CAUTION
ENWW
Using media outside HP specifications might cause problems for the MFP, requiring repair. This
repair is not covered by the HP warranty or service agreements.
Media specifications 183
Supported sizes of paper for input and output
Note
For more information on an HP output device, see the Installation Guide that came with the MFP
or output devices.
Tray or Bin
Capacity
Paper
Tray 1
Up to
100 sheets
●
●
Up to
10 envelopes
Maximum stack
height for
transparencies:
10 mm
(0.4 inch)
●
Standard detectable sizes:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, 11 x 17, JIS B5,
JIS B4, JPostD, 8K, 16K
Custom sizes:
Minimum: 98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 inches)
Maximum: 312 x 470 mm
(12.3 x 18.5 inches)
Envelope sizes:
Commercial #10, C5, DL,
Monarch, B5
Weight
64 to 216 g/m2
(17 to 58 lb bond)
Two-sided printing:
64 to 199 g/m2
(17 to 53 lb bond)
Note
Print envelopes, transparencies, and
labels only from Tray 1.
Trays 2
and 3
Up to
500 sheets
●
●
●
Tray 4
Up to
2000 sheets
●
●
Automatic
document
feeder
Up to
100 sheets
●
●
●
184 Appendix A Specifications
2
Standard detectable sizes:
Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Executive,
ISO A3, ISO A4-R, ISO A5, JIS B4,
JIS B5, 11 x 17
Standard undetectable sizes:
8K, 16K, JIS Executive, 8.5 x 13
(215 x 330 mm)
Custom sizes:
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.2 inches)
Maximum: 297 x 431 mm
(11.7 x 17 inches)
64 to 199 g/m
(17 to 53 lb bond)
Standard sizes:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, 11 x 17, JIS B4, JIS B5
Custom sizes:
Minimum: 182 x 210 mm
(7.2 x 8.3 inches)
Maximum: 297 x 431 mm
(11.7 x 17 inches)
64 to 199 g/m2
(17 to 53 lb bond)
Standard sizes:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, 11 x 17, JIS B5,
JIS B4, JPostD, Monarch, 8K, 16K
Custom sizes
Custom types: Transparencies
64 to 199 g/m2
(17 to 53 lb bond)
ENWW
Tray or Bin
Capacity
Paper
Upper bin
Up to
125 sheets
●
●
●
Duplex
printing
accessory
●
●
●
●
3000-sheet
stacker
Up to
3,000 sheets of
letter- or
A4-size paper
●
Up to
1,500 sheets of
A3 or 11 x 17
●
●
3000-sheet
stacker/
stapler
Up to
3,000 sheets of
letter- or
A4-size paper
●
Up to
1,500 sheets of
A3 or 11 x 17
Up to 50 sheets
stapled
●
●
ENWW
Weight
Standard sizes:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, 11 x 17, JIS B5,
JIS B4, JPostD, Monarch, 8K, 16K
Custom sizes
Custom types: Envelopes, labels
64 to 216 g/m2
(17 to 58 lb bond)
Standard sizes:
Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Executive,
ISO A3, ISO A4, ISO A4-R, 11 x 17,
JIS B4, JIS B5
Standard undetectable sizes:
8K, 16K
Custom sizes
Custom types: Duplexing is not
supported for envelopes, labels, or
transparencies
64 to 199 g/m2
(17 to 53 lb bond)
Standard sizes for lower bin:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, 11 x 17, JIS B5,
JIS B4, 8K, 16K
●
Standard sizes for upper bin:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, 11 x 17, JIS B5,
JIS B4, JPostD, Monarch, 8K, 16K
Custom sizes
Custom types: Envelopes, labels,
transparencies, heavy paper
Standard sizes for lower bin:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, 11 x 17, JIS B5,
JIS B4, 8K, 16K
Standard sizes for upper bin:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, 11 x 17, JIS B5,
JIS B4, JPostD, Monarch, 8K, 16K
Custom sizes
Custom types: Envelopes, labels,
transparencies, heavy paper
●
●
●
64 to 199 g/m2
(17 to 53 lb bond) in
lower bin
64 to 216 g/m2
(17 to 58 lb bond) in
upper bin
64 to 199 g/m2
(17 to 53 lb bond) in
lower bin
64 to 216 g/m2
(17 to 58 lb bond) in
upper bin
Media specifications 185
Tray or Bin
Capacity
Paper
Multifunction
finisher
Up to
1,000 sheets of
stacked 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond) for
Letter and A4
(up to 50 sheets
stapled), and
500 sheets
stacked of
75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) for A3
and 11 x 17 (up
to 25 sheets
stapled)
●
●
●
Weight
Standard sizes:
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, JIS B4, JIS B5,
11 x 17
Custom sizes:
Minimum: 98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 inches)
Maximum: 312 x 470 mm
(12.3 x 18.5 inches)
Custom types: Envelopes, labels,
transparencies, heavy paper
●
Standard sizes for upper bin
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, JIS B4, JIS B5,
11 x 17
Custom sizes
Minimum: 98 x 170 mm
(3.9 x 6.7 inches)
Maximum: 305 x 470 mm
(12 x 18.5 inches)
Standard sizes for 8 mailbox bins
Letter, Legal, Executive, ISO A3,
ISO A4, ISO A5, JIS B4, JIS B5,
11 x 17
Custom sizes
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 inches)
Maximum: 297 x 432 mm
(11.7 x 17 inches)
●
●
64 to 199 g/m2
(17 to 53 lb bond) in
lower booklet bin
64 to 216 g/m2
(17 to 58 lb bond) in
upper bin
Up to
40 booklets of
5 sheets
stacked or
20 booklets of
10 sheets
stacked
8-bin
mailbox
Up to
250 sheets of
A4- and
letter-size paper
per output bin
●
●
●
●
186 Appendix A Specifications
●
60 to 135 g/m2
(16 to 36 lb bond) in
8 mailbox bins
60 to 216 g/m2
(16 to 58 lb bond) in
upper bin
ENWW
Supported types of paper
Use settings on the MFP control panel to select the following types of paper and other print
media.
●
Plain
●
Pre-printed
●
Letterhead
●
Transparency (see Transparencies)
●
Prepunched
●
Labels (see Labels)
●
Bond
●
Recycled
●
Color
●
Card stock > 163 g/m2 (see Card stock and heavy paper)
●
Rough 90-105 g/m2
●
Envelope (for Tray 1 only; see Envelopes)
Guidelines for using paper
For best results, use conventional 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper. Make sure the paper is of good
quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or
bent edges.
If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the label
on the package of paper.
Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to the MFP. Do not use
letterhead paper that is printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in some types of
thermography, and do not use raised letterhead. Coated papers and some transparencies can
wrap around the fuser roller and possibly cause jams.
The MFP uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Make sure that any colored paper or
preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with the MFP fusing temperature (200°C or 392°F
for 0.1 second).
Resolving issues with paper and other print media
Use this section to resolve common problems with paper and other print media.
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Poor print quality or toner
adhesion, problems with
feeding
Too moist, too rough, too
smooth, or embossed;
faulty paper lot
Try another kind of paper, between
100 to 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture
content.
Dropouts, jamming, curl
Stored improperly
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof
wrapping.
Increased gray
background shading
Too heavy
●
Excessive curl
Too moist, wrong grain
direction or short-grain
construction
Problems with feeding
ENWW
●
●
●
Use a lighter-weight paper.
Use the upper bin.
Use the upper bin.
Use long-grain paper.
Media specifications 187
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Jamming, damage to
MFP
Cutouts or perforations
Use paper that is free of cutouts or
perforations.
Problems with feeding
Ragged edges
Use supported types of media.
Multisheet feeding
Paper sticking together
Remove paper, fan it, and then reload it.
Labels
To avoid damaging the MFP, use only labels recommended for use in monochrome laser
printers. Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once.
CAUTION
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, custom paper, or paper heavier
than 216 g/m2 (58 lb bond). Damage to the MFP and jams might result.
Label construction
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
●
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200°C (392°F), the maximum fusing
temperature of the MFP.
●
Arrangement: Only use full-sheet labels. Labels can peel off sheets with spaces between the
labels, causing serious jams.
●
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inch) of curl in any
direction.
●
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
Transparencies
CAUTION
Transparencies used in the MFP must be able to withstand 200°C (392°F), the maximum fusing
temperature of the MFP. To avoid damaging the MFP, use only transparencies recommended for
use in monochrome laser printers.
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, custom paper, or paper heavier
than 216 g/m2 (58 lb bond). Damage to the MFP and jamming might result.
If you have problems printing transparencies, use Tray 1 and send them to the upper bin.
Envelopes
Note
To print envelopes, use Tray 1 and print them to the upper bin.
188 Appendix A Specifications
ENWW
Envelope construction
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between
manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on
envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the
following components:
●
Weight: See Media specifications for supported envelope weight.
●
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.3 inch) curl
and should not contain air. (Envelopes that trap air can cause problems.)
●
Condition: Make sure envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Sizes in Tray 1: See Supported sizes of paper for input and output.
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip, or with more than one flap that folds over to seal, must
use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure of the MFP. The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
Envelopes with double-side-seams
Double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than
diagonal seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Make sure the seam extends all the
way to the corner of the envelope.
Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to good print quality. Envelopes should be stored
flat. If air is trapped in an envelope creating an air bubble, then the envelope can wrinkle during
printing.
Card stock and heavy paper
For optimum product performance, do not use paper heavier than 216 g/m2 (58 lb bond) in
Tray 1 or 199 g/m2 (53 lb bond) in other trays. Paper that is too heavy might cause misfeeds,
stacking problems, jams, poor toner fusing, poor print quality, or excessive mechanical wear.
Card stock construction
Note
ENWW
●
Smoothness: 135 to 216 g/m2 (36 to 58 lb bond) card stock should have a smoothness
rating of 100 to 180 Sheffield.
●
Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm (0.2 inch) of curl.
●
Condition: Make sure card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Sizes: See the sizes listed for Tray 1.
Before loading card stock in Tray 1, make sure it is regular in shape and not damaged. Also, make
sure the cards are not stuck together.
Media specifications 189
Environmental specifications
Power consumption
Power consumption (average, in watts) a
Product model
Printing b
Copying b
Ready c
Sleep 1 d , e
Sleep 2
Off
HP LaserJet
9050mfp
1130 Watts
(50 ppm)
1160 Watts
(50 ppm)
305 Watts
221 Watts
59 Watts
0.9 Watts
HP LaserJet
9040mfp
1070 Watts
(40 ppm)
1120 Watts
(40 ppm)
305 Watts
221 Watts
59 Watts
0.9 Watts
a.Values current as of May 27, 2004. Values subject to change, see www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for current information.
b.Power reported is highest values measured for printing and copying using all standard voltages.
c. Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 1045 BTU/hour (HP LaserJet 9050mfp), 1045 BTU/hour
(HP LaserJet 9040mfp).
d.Default time from Ready mode to Sleep 1 = 15 minutes, and to Sleep 2 = 90 minutes
(HP LaserJet 9050mfp), 60 minutes (HP LaserJet 9040mfp).
e.Recovery time from Sleep 1 to start of printing = 20 seconds, and from Sleep 2 to start of
printing = 145 seconds.
Power requirements
WARNING!
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This may damage the printer and void the product warranty.
Rated short-term current
190 Appendix A Specifications
110-Volt models
230-Volt models
100-127V (+/- 10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
220-240V (+/- 10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
12 Amps
5.3 Amps
ENWW
Acoustical specifications
Declared per
ISO 9296 a
HP LaserJet 9050mfp
Sound power level
Sound pressure level
(Bystander position)
HP LaserJet 9040mfp
Sound power level
Sound pressure level
(Bystander position)
Printing/copying
(49 ppm)
LWAd = 7.4 Bels (A)
[74 dB (A)]
Ready
LWAd = 5.7 Bels (A)
[57 dB(A)]
or essentially inaudible
Printing/copying
(49 ppm)
LpAm = 58 dB(A)
Ready
LpAm = 39 dB(A)
or essentially inaudible
Printing/copying
(39 ppm)
LWAd = 7.4 Bels (A)
[74 dB(A)]
Ready
LWAd = 5.7 Bels (A)
[57 dB(A)]
or essentially inaudible
Printing/copying
(39 ppm)
LpAm = 58 dB(A)
Ready
LpAm = 39 dB(A)
or essentially inaudible
a.Values current as of March 2, 2004. Values subject to change, see www.hp.com/support/
lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for current information.
Note
ENWW
Configuration tested: Base unit printing and scanning continuous with ADF on A4 paper at 49 ppm
(HP LaserJet 9050mfp) and 39 ppm (HP LaserJet 9040mfp) with no output device.
Environmental specifications 191
Operating environment
Operating temperature
10 to 32.5°C (50 to 91°F)
Relative humidity
10 to 80%
Storage temperature
-40 to 15.6°C (-40 to +60°F)
Storage humidity
15 to 90%
Speed, in pages per
minute (ppm)
50 ppm (HP LaserJet 9050mfp)
40 ppm (HP LaserJet 9040mfp)
192 Appendix A Specifications
ENWW
B
Control panel menus
Overview
The control panel menu layout represents an attempt to show the menus used by all end users
while protecting the menus used by administrators. End users will typically use the first three
menus of the list. Administrators and service technicians will use the other items, which can be
protected by a personal identification number (PIN).
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the driver or software
application. This is the most convenient method to control the MFP, and will override the MFP
control panel settings. See the help files associated with the software, or for more information
about how to gain access to the driver, see Helpful software for increased flexibility. If you cannot
access a menu or an item, it is either not an option for the MFP, or your network administrator
has locked the function. (The control panel displays the message ACCESS DENIED MENUS
LOCKED.) See your system administrator.
Note
Driver and software commands override the MFP control-panel settings.
From the control panel, you can print a menu map that shows the layout and current settings of
the control panel menu items (see Menu map).
Additional menu items can appear in the control panel, depending on the options currently
installed in the MFP.
This appendix lists all the items and possible values for the MFP. (Default values are listed in the
“Item” column.)
Note
For more information about the HP output devices, see the User Guide that came with the device.
This appendix includes information about the following topics:
●
The Retrieve job menu shows jobs stored on the MFP. Jobs are listed by user and job name.
See Job storage features for information of how to store jobs.
●
The Information menu lists printable menu map and other information pages.
●
The Paper handling menu is used to set the paper type (and size, if it is not detected) for
each tray.
●
The Configure device menu allows administrators to set defaults, I/O ports, run diagnostics,
and reset the MFP.
The following submenus are available on the Configure device menu:
• Originals submenu
• Copying submenu
• Enhancement submenu
• Sending submenu
• Printing submenu
• Print quality submenu
• System setup submenu
ENWW
Overview 193
• I/O submenu
• Resets submenu
●
The Fax menu is used to set options for sending and receiving faxes.
●
The Diagnostics menu provides information about the MFP that administrators and service
technicians can use to define settings, view usage information, and troubleshoot problems.
●
The Service menu allows service technicians to monitor MFP status and to provide
appropriate assistance during a service call.
194 Appendix B Control panel menus
ENWW
Retrieve job menu
Note
If no private, stored, quick copy, or proof-and-hold jobs are stored on the MFP hard disk or RAM
memory, the message NO STORED JOBS is displayed when the menu is selected.
1
The user is presented a list of user names.
2
The user selects a user name, and is then shown a list of jobs stored for that user.
3
The user selects a job name, and can print or delete. If a job requires a PIN to print,
(lock
symbol) appears next to the PRINT command and a PIN must be provided. If a job requires a
PIN to print,
(lock symbol) appears next to the DELETE command and a PIN must be
provided.
4
If the user selects PRINT, the MFP prompts the user to specify the number of copies to print
(1 to 32,000).
Information menu
To print an information page, scroll to the information page you want and touch OK.
.
Item
Explanation
PRINT MENU MAP
Generates a menu map that shows layout and current settings of the control
menu items.
The MFP will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
PRINT
CONFIGURATION
Generates a page detailing the current configuration of the MFP.
PRINT SUPPLIES
STATUS PAGE
Generates a page that shows the number of pages remaining for each supply in
the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed.
PRINT USAGE PAGE
Generates a page that contains information that could be used for cost
accounting. This item is only available if a hard disk is installed.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed.
PRINT
FILE DIRECTORY
Generates a directory page containing information for all installed mass storage
devices.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed.
ENWW
PRINT PCL
FONT LIST
Generates a typeface list of all PCL fonts available on the MFP.
PRINT PS
FONT LIST
Generates a typeface list of all PS fonts available on the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed.
Retrieve job menu 195
Paper handling menu
When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel, you can print
by choosing the type and size of paper from the driver or software application. For more
information, see Specifying paper to print on.
Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) are accessible from a software
application, or from the driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Driver and software
application settings override control panel settings. For more information, see Using features in
the printer driver.
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY <N>
SIZE=LETTER
ANY SIZE
LETTER
LETTER ROTATED
LEGAL
A4
A4 ROTATED
EXECUTIVE
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
A3
A5
B4(JIS)
B5(JIS)
8K
16K
8.5 X 13
11 X 17
CUSTOM
ANY CUSTOM
Allows the user to set the paper size for Tray 2, Tray 3,
and Tray 4 when the custom switch is in the CUSTOM
position. Size is detected if the switch is in the STANDARD
position. Substitute the tray number for <N>.
TRAY <N>
TYPE=PLAIN
ANY TYPE
PLAIN
PREPRINTED
LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
CARDSTOCK>163
ROUGH 90-105 G/M2
ENVELOPE *
Allows the user to specify the type of media in each tray.
Substitute the tray number for <N>.
196 Appendix B Control panel menus
*ENVELOPE appears for Tray 1 only.
ENWW
Configure device menu
This menu contains all administrative functions.
Originals submenu
Although you can gain access to each item using the touch-screen graphical display, you can
also select copying and sending items through the MFP menus.
Item
Values
Explanation
PAPER
SIZE=LETTER|A4
LETTER
Sets the paper size of the original document.
11x17
The MFP uses the paper sensors to automatically describe the
size of the original document. If paper is not detect, the user can
select from a list of supported paper sizes.
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
A3
A4
A5
B4(JIS)
B5(JIS)
NUMBER OF
SIDES=1
1
2
Indicates whether one side or both sides of the original document
are scanned.
The MFP prompts the user to turn the page over if 2 is selected
and the original is placed on the glass.
ORIENTATION=
PORTRAIT
PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Indicates whether the orientation of the original is portrait (short
edge top) or landscape (long edge top).
CONTENT=MIXED
MIXED
Describes the type of image on the original.
PHOTO
TEXT
Choose photo if the original consists of graphic images, or text if
the image consists of text only. Choose mixed if the original
contains graphics and text.
0-8
Specifies the contrast and brightness of the image. You can
choose from nine increments.
DENSITY=4
0=darkest
8=lightest
HEAVY
PAPER=OFF
ENWW
ON
Indicates if heavy paper is being scanned.
OFF
If Heavy Paper is set, the scanner will adjust the tension on the
paper as it moves through the scanning area. It can impact output
quality for papers whose weight is more than 100 g/m2 .
Configure device menu 197
Copying submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
NUMBER OF
SIDES=1
1
2
Indicates whether images should be printed on one side or both
sides of the copy.
ON
Indicates whether copies should be collated or not collated.
COLLATE=ON
OFF
COPIES=1
1-999
Indicates the number of copies made when you press START
without selecting the number of copies using the numeric keypad.
STAPLE=NONE
None
1-Edge
Corner
2-Edge
3-Edge
6-Edge
Opposite
Saddle Stitch
If stapling is requested, indicates where the staple is placed and
how many staples are placed.
If a stacker is attached to the MFP, stapling is not an option.
Note
Because of paper size, paper orientation, and paper feed
direction, you should experiment with staple options to find the
results you want.
Enhancement submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
SHARPNESS=2
0-4
Specifies the sharpness setting.
0=minimum sharpness
4=maximum sharpness
BACKGROUND
REMOVAL=2
0-8
Controls the amount of background material from the original that
is eliminated on the copy. Background removal is useful when you
copy both sides and do not want the material on the first side to be
visible on the second side of the copy.
0=minimum background removal (more background is visible)
8=maximum background removal (less background is visible)
198 Appendix B Control panel menus
ENWW
Sending submenu
Item
Values
Options
Explanation
E-MAIL
SCAN
PREFERENCE=
COLOR
COLOR
BLACK AND
WHITE
Determines whether the document is scanned in
color or black and white.
FILE
TYPE=PDF
PDF
TIFF
M-TIFF
JPEG
Specifies the file format of the e-mail attachment.
FILE SIZE=
STANDARD
SMALL
STANDARD
LARGE
Specifies the compression of a file, which
determines the file size.
75 DPI
150 DPI
200 DPI
300 DPI
Specifies the resolution of a document or image, a
lower dpi will result in a smaller file size, but image
quality might be affected.
ON
OFF
Enables the MFP to check e-mail syntax. Valid e-mail
addresses require the "@" sign and a ".".
RESOLUTION=
150DPI
ADDRESS
VALIDATION=
ON
FIND SEND
GATEWAYS
REPLICATE
MFP
ENWW
The MFP searches the network for SMTP and LDAP
gateways that the MFP can use to send e-mail.
SMTP GATEWAY
The IP address of the SMTP server used to send
e-mail.
LDAP GATEWAY
The IP address of the LDAP gateway that the MFP
uses to look up e-mail information.
TEST SEND
GATEWAYS
Tests the configured gateways to see if they are
functional.
Copies the send settings from one MFP to another.
Configure device menu 199
Printing submenu
Some items in this menu are available from a software application, or from the driver (if the
appropriate driver is installed). Driver and program settings override control-panel settings. For
more information, see Using features in the printer driver.
Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES=1
1 to 32,000
Set the default number of copies by selecting any number
from 1 to 32,000. Use the numeric keypad to select the
number of copies.
Note
It is best to set the number of copies from the driver or
software program. (Driver and software settings override
control-panel settings.)
DEFAULT PAPER
SIZE=
LETTER
LETTER
LEGAL
A4
EXECUTIVE
11X17
A3
B4(JIS)
B5(JIS)
CUSTOM
A5
LETTER ROTATED
STATEMENT
8.5X13
12X18
A4 ROTATED
RA3
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
DPOSTCARDS(JIS)
8K
16k
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
Set the default image size for paper and envelopes. (The
item name will change from paper to envelope as you
scroll through the available sizes.)
DEFAULT CUSTOM
PAPER SIZE
UNIT OF MEASURE
X DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
Allows the user to set a custom paper size for any of the
installed trays. Substitute the tray number for <N>. This
menu only appears when the selected tray custom switch
is in the custom size position. The user selects the X and Y
dimensions of the custom paper size using the ruler labels
in the trays.
PAPER
DESTINATION
UPPER BIN
LOWER BIN
LOWER BOOKLET BIN
BINS 1-8
Allows the user to configure the output paper bin
destination. Only installed bins will appear on the menu.
OFF
ON
Set the value to ON to print on both sides (duplex) or OFF to
print on one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper.
DUPLEX=OFF
The default is the first face-down bin of the output device.
For more information, see Printing on both sides of paper
(duplexing).
200 Appendix B Control panel menus
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
DUPLEX
BINDING=LONG
EDGE
LONG EDGE
SHORT EDGE
Allows the user to change the binding edge for duplex
printing. The menu item is displayed when a duplex
printing accessory is installed in the MPF and DUPLEX=ON.
OVERRIDE A4/
LETTER=
YES
YES
NO
This command is used to print on Letter-size media when
an A4 job is sent but no A4-size media is loaded in the
MFP (or to print on A4-size media when a Letter job is
sent, but no Letter-size media is loaded in the MFP).
MANUAL FEED=OFF
OFF
ON
Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than
automatically from a tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON and
Tray 1 is empty, the MFP goes offline when it receives a
print job. It then displays MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE].
For more information, see Manually feeding paper from
Tray 1.
EDGE TO EDGE
OVERRIDE=NO
NO
YES
Turns the edge-to-edge mode on or off for all print jobs.
This mode can be overridden inside a print job by an
edge-to-edge PJL variable.
COURIER
FONT=REGULAR
REGULAR
DARK
Select the version of Courier font to use:
REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the
HP LaserJet 4 Series printers.
DARK: The internal Courier font available on the
HP LaserJet III Series printers.
Both fonts are not available at the same time.
WIDE A4=NO
YES
NO
The Wide A4 setting changes the number of characters
that can be printed on a single line of A4 paper.
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one
line.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one
line.
ENWW
PRINT PS
ERRORS=OFF
ON
OFF
Select ON to print the PS error page when PS errors occur.
PRINT PDF
ERRORS=OFF
ON
OFF
Select ON to print the PDF error page when PDF errors
occur.
Configure device menu 201
PCL submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
FORM LENGTH=60
5 to 128
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper
size. Enter the value using the numeric keypad.
ORIENTATION=
PORTRAIT
PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Allows the user to select default page orientation.
Note
It is best to set the page orientation from the printer driver
or software application. (Driver and software settings
override control panel settings.)
INTERNAL: Internal fonts.
FONT
SOURCE=INTERNAL
INTERNAL
CARD SLOT X
FONT NUMBER=0
0-999
The MFP assigns a number to each font and lists them on
the PCL Font List (See PCL or PS font list). The font
number appears in the Font # column of the printout.
FONT PITCH=10.00
0.44-99.99
Using the numeric keypad, enter a value. This item might
not appear, depending on the font selected.
SYMBOL SET=PC-8
Variety of
available symbol
sets
Select any one of several available symbol sets from the
MFP control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all
the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended
for line draw characters.
APPEND CR TO
LF=NO
YES
NO
Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed
encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text,
no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX,
indicate a new line using only the line feed control code.
This option allows the user to append the required carriage
return to each line feed.
SUPRESS BLANK
PAGES=NO
NO
YES
When set to YES, form feeds are ignored if the page is
blank.
202 Appendix B Control panel menus
CARD SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of the three
DIMM slots.
ENWW
Print quality submenu
Some items in this menu are accessible from a software application, or from the driver (if the
appropriate driver is installed). Driver and software settings override control panel settings. For
more information, see Using features in the printer driver.
Item
Values
Explanation
SET
REGISTRATION
PRINT TEST
PAGE
Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from
top to bottom, and left to right. You can also align the image on the
front, with the image printed on the back.
SOURCE=TRAY 2
ADJUST
TRAY <X>
FUSER MODES
List of paper
types
Configure the fuser mode associated with each paper type.
The fuser mode can only be changed from this menu option in the
control panel.
AUTO: Utilizes the optimum mode for that media type.
NORMAL: Normal temperature, prints at 50 pages per minute (ppm)
(40 ppm for the HP LaserJet 9040mfp).
LOW: Low temperature, prints at 50 ppm (40 ppm for the
HP LaserJet 9040mfp).
HIGH1: Raises the temperature, prints at 50 ppm (40 ppm for the
HP LaserJet 9040mfp).
HIGH2: Raises the temperature, prints at 32 ppm.
SPECIAL: Mode to print at normal speeds with a 40-second delay
added to the beginning of the next job. After each 400 pages are
printed, the first page of that job is printed at a slower speed in
order to clean the fuser. No defects should be noticeable on the
printed page. This is not a preferred setting.
The default value for each paper type is AUTO.
For a complete list of supported paper types, see Media
specifications.
CAUTION
If you change the fuser mode to HIGH1 or HIGH2, be sure to change
it back to the default when you are done printing. Setting a paper
type to HIGH1 or HIGH2 might shorten the life of some
consumables, such as the fuser, and might cause other failures or
jams.
RESOLUTION=
FASTRES 1200
300
600
FASTRES 1200
Select the resolution from the following values:
300: Produces draft print quality at maximum MFP speed. 300 dpi
(dots per inch) is recommended for some bitmapped fonts and
graphics, and for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of
printers.
600: Produces high print quality at maximum product speed.
FASTRES 1200: Produces optimum print quality (comparable to
1200 dpi) at maximum product speed.
Note
It is best to change the resolution from the driver or software
application. (Driver and software settings override control-panel
settings.)
ENWW
Configure device menu 203
Item
Values
Explanation
RET=MEDIUM
OFF
LIGHT
MEDIUM
DARK
Use MFP Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) setting to
produce print with smooth angles, curves, and edges.
All print resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefit from REt.
Note
It is best to change the REt setting from the driver or software
application. (Driver and software settings override control-panel
settings.)
ECONOMODE
ON
OFF
When turned on, the MFP prints with a reduced amount of toner
per page; however, the print quality of the page is drastically
reduced.
TONER
DENSITY=3
1-5
Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the toner
density setting. The settings range from 1 (light) to 5 (dark), but the
default setting of 3 usually produces the best results.
Note
It is best to change the toner density from the driver or software
application. (Driver and software settings override control-panel
settings.)
SMALL PAPER
MODE=NORMAL
NORMAL
SLOW
When printing narrow media the part of the fuser rollers that do not
make contact with the media swell up and can cause wrinkles.
CREATE
CLEANING
PAGE
No value to
select
Touch OK to print a cleaning page (to clean excess toner from the
paper path).
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on
copier-grade paper (not bond or rough paper). Follow the
instructions on the cleaning page. The progress bar shows how
long before the process is complete.
System setup submenu
Items in this menu affect the MFP function. Configure the MFP according to your printing needs.
Item
Values
Explanation
DATE/TIME
DATE
DATE FORMAT
TIME
TIME FORMAT
Sets the start date and time for the MFP. The Real Time
Clock is set to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
JOB STORAGE
LIMIT=32
1-100
Specifies the number of jobs that can be stored on the MFP
hard-disk accessory.
JOB HELD
TIMEOUT=
OFF
OFF
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
Sets the amount of time that QuickCopy, proof and hold,
private, and stored jobs are kept before being automatically
deleted from the queue.
204 Appendix B Control panel menus
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
SHOW ADDRESS=OFF
AUTO
OFF
Sets whether or not the MFP IP address will be shown with
the Ready message. If this value is “on” the address of the
EIO card in slot 1 is shown.
TRAY BEHAVIOR
USE REQUESTED
TRAY
MANUAL FEED
PROMPT
PS DEFER
MEDIA
Specifies the behavior of the tray by indicating which tray the
MFP should print from.
USE REQUESTED TRAY sets the tray that the MFP should print
from for specified jobs. The values for this menu item are
EXCLUSIVELY (default) or FIRST.
MANUAL FEED PROMPT determines whether or not the MFP
prompts the user when a job does not match a requested
configured tray. The values for this menu item are ALWAYS
(default) or UNLESS LOADED.
PS DEFER MEDIA sets whether the paper-handling model is
based on PostScript rules or HP rules. The values for this
menu item are ENABLED (default) or DISABLED.
SLEEP DELAY=90
MINUTES
1 MINUTE
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
60 MINUTES
90 MINUTES
2 HOURS
4 HOURS
Sets how long the MFP remains idle before it enters Sleep
mode:
●
●
●
Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the MFP
when it is idle.
Reduces wear on the MFP electronic components (turns
off the display backlight).
When you send a print job, press a control panel key,
open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the MFP
automatically exits Sleep mode.
Note
Sleep turns off the backlight on the display, but the display is
still readable.
WAKE TIME
SUBMENU
SETTING WAKE
TIME
Sets the time that the MFP automatically comes out of Sleep
mode. This feature can be set for a different time for each
day of the week.
PERSONALITY=AUTO
AUTO
PCL
PS
PDF
XHTML
MIME
Select the default product language (personality). Possible
values are determined by which valid languages are installed
in the MFP.
ON
JOB
Set the amount of time that a clearable warning appears on
the printer control panel.
CLEARABLE
WARNINGS=JOB
Normally you should not change the product language (the
default is AUTO). If you change it to a specific product
language, the MFP does not automatically switch from one
language to another unless specific software commands are
sent to the MFP.
ON: Warning messages appear on the control panel until they
are cleared.
JOB: Warning messages appear on the control panel until the
end of the job from which they were generated.
ENWW
Configure device menu 205
Item
Values
Explanation
AUTO CONTINUE=ON
ON
OFF
Determine how the MFP reacts to errors.
ON: If an error prevents printing, the message is displayed,
and the MFP goes offline for 10 seconds before returning
online.
OFF: If an error prevents printing, the message remains on
the display, and the MFP does not print until Continue is
touched.
Note
To stop printing when out of staples (when a stapler
accessory is installed), set AUTO CONTINUE=OFF in the control
panel System setup menu.
CARTRIDGE LOW=
CONTINUE
CONTINUE
STOP
Determine how the MFP functions when toner is low. The
CARTRIDGE LOW message first appears when approximately
two weeks of typical printing remain in the cartridge. This
allows you sufficient time to order a new print cartridge.
CONTINUE: The MFP continues to print while the CARTRIDGE
LOW message is displayed.
STOP: The MFP goes offline and wait for further action.
For more information, see Managing the print cartridge.
CARTRIDGE
OUT=CONTINUE
STOP
CONTINUE
Determine how the MFP behaves when toner is out.
CONTINUE: The MFP displays REPLACE CARTRIDGE until the
cartridge is replaced. The MFP continues to print.
STOP: The MFP goes offline and waits until the cartridge is
replaced.
JAM RECOVERY=
AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
Determine how the MFP functions when a jam occurs.
AUTO: The MFP automatically selects the best mode for MFP
jam recovery (usually ON). This is the default setting.
ON: The MFP automatically reprints pages after a jam is
cleared.
OFF: The MFP does not reprint pages following a jam.
Printing performance might be increased with this setting.
LANGUAGE=ENGLISH
206 Appendix B Control panel menus
List of
available
languages
Sets the language of the control panel.
ENWW
I/O submenu
Items in the I/O (input/output) menu affect the communication between the MFP and the
computer.
Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT=15
5-300
Use this to select the I/O timeout period in seconds. (I/O timeout
refers to the time, measured in seconds, that the MFP waits
before ending a print job.)
This setting allows you to adjust timeout for best performance. If
data from other ports appear in the middle of your print job,
increase the timeout value.
Parallel input submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
HIGH SPEED=YES
YES
NO
Accepts faster parallel communications used for connections with
newer computers.
ADVANCED
FUNCTIONS=ON
ON
OFF
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. The default
is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284).
This setting allows the MFP to send status readback messages to
the computer. (Turning the parallel advanced functions on might
slow language switching.)
EIO X Jetdirect submenu
The EIO (enhanced input/output) submenu appears only when an EIO device is installed in an
EIO slot on the MFP (such as an HP Jetdirect print server). The items in the menu depend on the
particular accessory product installed. If the MFP contains an HP Jetdirect print server EIO card,
you can configure basic networking parameters using the EIO menu. These and other
parameters can also be configured through HP Web Jetadmin or other network configuration
tools (such as by using Telnet or browsing the embedded Web server).
For more information about the EIO submenu, see the documentation that came with the
EIO Jetdirect card.
ENWW
Configure device menu 207
Embedded Jetdirect submenu
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
TCP/IP
ENABLE
ON
Enable the TCP/IP protocol.
Disable the TCP/IP protocol.
OFF
An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used
to identify the device. This name is listed on the
Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name
is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of
the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
HOST NAME
CONFIG
METHOD
BOOTP
Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic
configuration from a BootP server.
DHCP
Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
for automatic configuration from a DHCP server.
AUTO IP
Use automatic link-local IP addressing. An address
in the form 169.254.x.x will be automatically
assigned.
MANUAL
IP ADDRESS
MANUAL
SETTINGS
208 Appendix B Control panel menus
SUBNET
MASK
Use the MANUAL SETTINGS menu to configure
TCP/IP parameters.
The unique IP address of the MFP.
The subnet mask for the MFP.
SYSLOG
SERVER
The IP address of the syslog server used to receive
and log syslog messages.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
The IP address of the gateway or router used for
communications with other networks.
IDLE
TIMEOUT
The time period, in seconds, after which an idle
TCP print data connection is closed (default is
270 seconds).
ENWW
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
TCP/IP
DEFAULT IP
AUTO IP
A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x will be set.
LEGACY
The address 192.0.0.192 will be set, consistent
with older Jetdirect products.
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of the Primary
Domain Name System (DNS) Server.
PRIMARY
DNS
.
SECONDARY
DNS
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of the Secondary
Domain Name System (DNS) Server.
PROXY
SERVER
Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded
applications in your MFP. A proxy server is typically
used by network clients for Internet access. It
caches Web pages, and provides a degree of
Internet security, for those clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IP address or
fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up
to 64 characters.
For some networks, you may need to contact your
Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy
server address.
Enter the port number used by the proxy server for
client support. The port number identifies the port
reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can
be a value from 0 to 65535.
PROXY PORT
IPX/SPX
ENWW
ENABLE
ON
OFF
Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.
Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.
FRAME TYPE
AUTO
Selects the frame type setting for your network.
AUTO (default) Automatically sets and limits the
frame type to the first one detected.
EN_8023
EN_II
EN_8022
EN_SNAP
Frame type selections for Ethernet networks.
APPLETALK
ENABLE
ON
OFF
Enable or disable the AppleTalk protocol.
DLC/LLC
ENABLE
ON
OFF
Enable or disable the DLC/LLC protocol.
Configure device menu 209
Item
Options
LINK SPEED
AUTO
Values
10T HALF
10T FULL
100TX HALF
100TX FULL
Explanation
The print server will automatically configure itself to
match the network’s link speed and communication
mode. If it fails, 100TX HALF is set.
10Mbps, half-duplex operation.
10Mbps, full-duplex operation.
100Mbps, half-duplex operation.
100Mbps, full-duplex operation.
Resets submenu
Note
Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or MFP configuration settings when
you select these items. Reset the MFP only under the following circumstances:
●
You want to restore the MFP default settings.
●
Communication between the MFP and computer has been interrupted.
●
You are having problems with a port.
The items in the Resets submenu will clear all memory in the MFP, while RESET clears only the
current job.
Fax menu
This menu will appear only if the optional Fax accessory is installed. For information about the
Fax menu, see the HP Fax User Guide.
210 Appendix B Control panel menus
ENWW
Diagnostics menu
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
PRINT EVENT
LOG
Generates a localized LIFO (last in, first out)
list of the 50 most recent entries in the error
log. The printed event log shows error
number, page count, error code, and
description or personality.
SHOW EVENT LOG
Allows the user to scroll through the contents
of the event log from the control panel, and
shows the 50 most recent events.
PAPER PATH
TEST
Generates a test page that is useful for testing
the paper handling features of the MFP.
PRINT TEST PAGE
SOURCE
ALL TRAYS
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY <N>
Specifies if paper from all of the trays or from a
specific tray is used when the test is
performed.
ALL BINS
STADNARD
OUTPUT
UPPER LEFT
BIN
Specifies which paper paths are tested.
DUPLEX
ON
OFF
Specifies if the duplexer is included when the
test is performed.
COPIES
1
10
50
100
500
Specifies how many sheets of paper from the
specified source are sent when the test is
performed.
SENSORS
ON
OFF
Specifies if sensor information is displayed as
the paper moves through the path or if only the
status of the device is displayed during the
paper path test.
DESTINATION
SCANNER TESTS
ENWW
LOWER LAMP
UPPER LAMP
SHUTTER SOLENOID
WEIGHT SOLENOID
SENSORS
ADF OUTPUT MOTOR
ADF INPUT MOTOR
ADF INPUT REVERSE
FLATBED MOTOR
This menu item is used by a service technician
to diagnose potential printer problems.
Diagnostics menu 211
Item
Options
CONTROL PANEL
LEDs
DISPLAY
BUTTONS
TOUCHSCREEN
Values
Explanation
This menu item is used by a service technician
to diagnose potential printer problems.
Service menu
The Service menu is locked. A service technician must type a PIN to open the menu.
212 Appendix B Control panel menus
ENWW
C
MFP memory and expansion
Overview
This appendix includes:
●
Determining memory requirements
●
Installing memory
●
Checking memory installation
●
Saving resources (permanent resources)
●
Web access feature
The MFP has two double data rate (DDR) DIMM slots to provide more MFP memory. DDR
DIMMs are available in 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 MB, for a maximum of 512 MB.
The MFP has two compact flash slots to provide the following features:
Note
●
Flash memory cards, available in 16, 32, and 64 MB. Unlike standard MFP memory,
compact flash memory can be used to permanently store downloaded items in the MFP,
even when the MFP is off. The MFP supports Type 1 and Type 2 compact flash memory.
●
To add flash-based memory accessory fonts, macros, and patterns, use the appropriate
DDR DIMM.
●
To add other flash-based printer languages and MFP options, use the appropriate DDR
DIMM.
Single in line memory modules (SIMMs) used on previous HP LaserJet products are not
compatible with this MFP.
For ordering information, see Parts and accessories, or go to www.hp.com/support.
Determining memory requirements
The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents you print. Your MFP can
print most text and graphics at 1,200 dpi FastRes without additional memory.
You might want to add more memory to the MFP if you often print complex graphics or PS
documents, print two-sided documents (duplex printing), use many downloaded fonts, or print
large paper sizes (such as A3, B4, or 11 x 17).
ENWW
Overview 213
Installing memory
To install DDR memory DIMMs
Use this procedure to install additional memory. Before you begin, print the configuration (touch
Menu, touch Information, and then touch Print Configuration) to find out how much memory
is installed in the MFP before adding more memory. The table lists the maximum amount of
memory allowed for each DIMM slot.
Slot label on the
Configuration page
Slot label on the
Formatter board
Description
Slot 1
J1
256 MB
Slot 2
J2
Empty
Total
CAUTION
256 MB
Static electricity can damage DDR DIMMs. When handling DDR DIMMs, either wear an antistatic
wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package, then touch bare metal
on the MFP.
To install memory
1
If you have not already done so, print the configuration to find out how much memory is
installed in the MFP before adding more memory.
2
Turn the MFP off. Disconnect the power cord and any cables.
214 Appendix C MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
Note
ENWW
3
Loosen the two captive thumb screws on the back of the MFP.
4
Grasp the screws and pull the formatter board out of the MFP. Place it on a flat,
non-conductive surface.
5
Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Hold the DIMM with fingers against the side
edges and thumbs against the back edge. Align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM
slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open, or outward.)
See Installing memory for the maximum amount of memory for each DIMM slot.
Installing memory 215
6
Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). Make sure the locks on each side of the
DIMM snap inward into place. (To remove a DIMM, the locks must be released.)
7
Slide the formatter board back into the MFP and tighten the two screws.
8
Plug in the power cord and connect all cables. Turn the MFP on.
216 Appendix C MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
To install a compact flash memory card
CAUTION
ENWW
Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the MFP.
The MFP does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you install a
camera-type flash memory card, a message asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card
appears on the control-panel display. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will
be lost.
1
Turn the MFP off and disconnect all power and interface cables.
2
Loosen the two captive thumb screws on the back of the MFP.
3
Grasp the screws and pull the formatter board out of the MFP. Place it on a flat,
non-conductive surface.
4
Remove the compact flash from the antistatic package. Hold the compact flash with fingers
against the side edges and thumbs against the back edge. Align the notches on the compact
flash with the compact flash slot.
Installing memory 217
5
Press the compact flash straight into the slot.
CAUTION
Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle.
Note
The first flash memory slot marked “Firmware Slot” is reserved for firmware only. Slots 2 and 3
should be used for all other solutions.
6
Slide the formatter board back into the MFP and tighten the two screws.
7
Plug in the power cord and connect all cables. Turn the MFP on.
218 Appendix C MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
Checking memory installation
Follow this procedure to verify that DDR DIMMs and flash memory cards are installed correctly:
1
Check that the MFP control panel displays READY when the MFP is turned on. If an error
message appears, a DIMM or flash memory card might have been incorrectly installed.
2
Print the configuration page.
3
Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the configuration
before the DIMM installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, one of the
following situations might have occurred:
• The DIMM might not be installed correctly. Repeat the installation procedure.
• The DIMM might be defective. Try a new DIMM, or try installing the DIMM in a different
slot.
Note
If you installed a printer language (personality), check the Installed Personalities and Options
section on the configuration page. This area should list the new printer language.
Saving resources (permanent resources)
Utilities or jobs that you downloaded to the MFP sometimes include resources (for example,
fonts, macros, or patterns). Resources that are internally marked as permanent remain in the
MFP memory until you turn the MFP off.
If you do not have a flash DIMM for storing downloaded resources, you might want to change the
amount of memory allocated to each language when downloading an unusually large number of
fonts, or if the MFP is in a shared environment.
The minimum amount of memory that can be allocated to resource saving is 400 KB each for
PCL and PS.
ENWW
Checking memory installation 219
Web access feature
Using the Web access feature
The MFP comes equipped with a Web access feature. U the Web access feature to obtain the
following information about the MFP:
●
control panel messages
●
supplies levels and ordering
●
tray configuration
●
MFP control panel menu configurations
●
MFP configuration page
●
product event log
●
MFP usage (types of print jobs)
●
network configuration and management
●
e-mail alerts
You can also use the Web access feature to perform the following print job management
functions that would usually be done at the MFP control panel:
●
change MFP settings
●
change MFP configuration
●
cancel print jobs
To gain access to the Web access feature
Note
To use the Web access feature, you must have an IP-based network and a Web browser.
In your Web browser, type the IP address assigned to the MFP. For example, if the MFP IP
address is 192.1.2.3, you would type this address:
http://192.1.2.3
For more information about the Web access feature, see the online HP Embedded Web Server
for HP LaserJet Printers Users Guide available at www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or
www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
220 Appendix C MFP memory and expansion
ENWW
D
Regulatory information
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally
sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on
our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves
money without affecting the high performance of this product. The HP LaserJet 9050mfp
qualifies for ENERGY STAR® (Version 1.0), which is a voluntary program to encourage the
development of energy-efficient office products.
ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registered mark. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard
Company has determined this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
For more information, see www.energystar.gov.
Toner consumption
Draft mode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.
Paper use
This product's automatic duplex feature and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page)
capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program 221
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the
ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product's life.
HP LaserJet printing supplies
In many countries/regions, this product's printing supplies (for example, print cartridge) can be
returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An
easy-to-use and free take back program is available in more than 30 countries/regions.
Multi-lingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print
cartridge and supplies package.
HP printing supplies returns and recycling program information
Since 1992, HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge in 86% of
the world market where HP LaserJet supplies are sold. Postage-paid and pre-addressed labels
are included within the instruction guide in most HP LaserJet print cartridge boxes. Labels and
bulk boxes are also available through the website: www.hp.com/recycle.
More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2002 through the
HP Planet Partners supplies recycling program. This record number represents 26 million
pounds of print cartridge materials diverted from landfills. Worldwide HP recycled an average of
80% of the print cartridge by weight consisting primarily of plastic and metals. Plastics and
metals are used to make new products such as HP products, plastic trays and spools. The
remaining materials are disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner.
US returns
For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies, HP encourages
the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single,
pre-paid, pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information in the
U.S., call 800-340-2445 or visit the HP website at www.hp.com/recycle.
Non-US returns
Non-US customers should call the local HP Sales and Service Office or visit the www.hp.com/
recycle website for further information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and
Recycling program.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in
the Print Media Guide. Go to www.hp.com/support for ordering information. This product is
suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the control panel liquid crystal
display that might require special handling at end-of-life.
This HP product contains a lithium battery on the formatter board that might require special
handling at end-of-life.
For recycling information, you can contact www.hp.com/recycle or contact your local authorities
or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.
222 Appendix D Regulatory information
ENWW
Material safety data sheets
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) can be obtained by contacting the HP website at:
www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety.
Extended warranty
HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP-supplied internal
components. The hardware maintenance covers a three-year period from date of the HP product
purchase. The customer must purchase HP SupportPack within 90 days of the HP product
purchase. For more information, contact the HP Customer Care Service and HP Customer
Support group. See the HP support flyer for more information.
For more information
To obtain information about the following environmental topics, go to the website(s) shown
below:
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●
HP's commitment to the environment
●
HP's environmental management system
●
HP's end-of-life product return and recycling program
●
MSDS
Visit: www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/
safety.
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program 223
224 Appendix D Regulatory information
ENWW
E
Administration tasks
Overview
This section presents some of the system administrator tasks.
ENWW
●
Embedded Web server
●
Configuring and verifying an IP address
●
Digital sending configuration applet
●
Using control panel menus
●
Device Storage Manager
●
Software for networks
●
Diagnostics menu
Overview 225
Embedded Web server
The embedded Web server allows you to display status information, change settings, and
manage the product from your computer.
The embedded Web server requires a connection to the network, which is provided through the
product HP Jetdirect network card. The following requirements must be met before you can use
the embedded Web server:
• a TCP/IP-based network.
• a Web browser installed on your computer, preferably either Netscape Navigator 4.7x or
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0x or later.
Note
You can gain access to the embedded Web server from any operating system that supports the
TCP/IP protocol and a Web browser. Parallel cable connections and IPX-based network product
connections are not supported. You cannot view the embedded Web server pages from outside
of a firewall.
You can reach the product home page through the embedded Web server by entering the
product IP address, or through HP Web Jetadmin.
HP Web Jetadmin is not included in the product installation software, but can be downloaded
from the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
In the embedded Web server, you can perform the following tasks:
●
set up a support contact and support URLs.
●
set up a password to control who can remotely gain access to the networking pages.
●
view general network status information, including network statistics stored on the print
server.
For more information, see the online HP Embedded Web Server for HP LaserJet Printers Users
Guide, available at www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
Checking the toner level by using the embedded Web server
1
In your Web browser, type the IP address for the product home page. This takes you to the
product status page.
2
On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status
page, which provides toner level information. See Supplies status page for information about
the supplies status page.
226 Appendix E Administration tasks
ENWW
Configuring and verifying an IP address
TCP/IP addresses can be assigned and configured on an HP Jetdirect print server using several
options:
●
HP Web Jetadmin
●
Embedded Web server
TCP/IP assignment
The system administrator or primary user is responsible for determining the TCP/IP address for a
specific print server. If you are unsure what the TCP/IP address should be or if you are unfamiliar
with using TCP/IP on a network, go to the HP Web site at www.hp.com. Click Search in the
upper left corner of the Web page and search for TCP/IP Overview.
Automatic discovery
The product is equipped with an HP Jetdirect embedded print server. If a BootP or DHCP server
is available during product installation, the print server is automatically assigned an IP address
for use on the network. This occurs because the print server defaults to 192.0.0.192 (Legacy
default) or to 159.254.x.x (Auto IP) if the print server cannot obtain an IP address over the
network from a BootP or DHCP server. The default that is assigned depends on the particular
network (small/private or enterprise) by using sensing algorithms.
To determine the new IP address, print a configuration page and check the TCP/IP status and
address.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
When the product is turned on, the HP Jetdirect print server broadcasts DHCP requests. DHCP
automatically downloads an IP address from a network server. DHCP servers maintain a fixed
set of IP addresses and only loan an IP address to the print server. Consult your operating
system documentation to set up DHCP service on your network.
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration
Print a configuration page at the control panel. Check the TCP/IP status and the TCP/IP
addresses. If the information is incorrect, check your hardware connections (cables, hubs,
routers, or switches) or recheck the validity of the TCP/IP address.
Changing an IP address
Use the following procedures if you need to change the product TCP/IP address.
HP Web Jetadmin
Open HP Web Jetadmin. Type the TCP/IP address in the Quick Device Search field and click
Go. At the top menu bar, follow this procedure for discovery options.
ENWW
1
In the drop-down menu, click Devices.
2
In the drop-down menu, click New Devices. Click Go.
3
Click the column header of your choice (such as IP Address or Device Model) to arrange the
list of available devices in ascending or descending order.
4
Highlight the product to configure, and click Open Device.
5
From the sub-menu at the top of the HP Web Jetadmin screen, click Configuration.
Configuring and verifying an IP address 227
6
Click the network link located on the left side of the configuration screen.
7
Type the new IP information. You might need to scroll down for more options.
8
Click Apply to save the settings.
9
Click the Refresh button located next to the question mark on the right side of the screen.
10 Verify the IP information by clicking Status Diagnostics or by printing a configuration page.
Embedded Web server
The product has an embedded Web server that can be used to modify the TCP/IP parameters.
To use the embedded Web server, the HP Jetdirect print server must have an IP address already
configured. On a network, this is done automatically during initial product installation.
1
In a supported Web browser, type the current IP address of the HP Jetdirect print server as
the URL. The Device Status page of the embedded Web server appears.
2
Click Networking. From this page, you can modify the network configuration of the MFP.
Digital sending configuration applet
To gain access to the embedded Web server digital sending configuration applet, follow these
steps:
Note
1
Open the embedded Web server.
2
Click the Settings tab.
3
Click Digital Sending.
You might be prompted to install a plug-in for your Web browser (the plug-in is required to run the
applet).
Use the digital sending configuration applet of the embedded Web server to configure e-mail
settings for outgoing and incoming mail. This enables you to use “send and receive” capabilities
and perform the following tasks:
●
enable and disable the digital sending service and establish a maximum file size.
●
set the SMTP address for digital sending.
●
set an alias to be displayed in the From field to replace the full e-mail address.
●
set the default Subject field.
●
use advanced features:
• establish fixed default Message Text.
• establish default document settings.
●
test digital sending settings using the screen Test button.
●
configure LDAP addressing for digital sending.
LDAP addressing settings
Use the LDAP addressing settings to perform the following tasks:
●
establish LDAP parameters to allow access to a centralized network address book.
●
enable the Test button to verify configuration.
228 Appendix E Administration tasks
ENWW
Preferences settings
Use the Preferences settings to perform the following tasks:
●
set the following default flatbed scanner settings:
• default document size.
• default document type: text, graphics, or both.
• two-sided page.
●
Note
set administrator contact information to allow notification of errors that require your attention.
See www.hp.com/support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp for more information.
Finding the IP address of the SMTP and LDAP servers
In order to use the Send to E-mail feature, the MFP must be connected to an IP network, and
configured with the IP address or Hostname of a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server.
Optionally, the MFP can be configured to use a V2 or V3 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) address book. When configured to use an LDAP address book, you can more easily
address Send to E-mail jobs by typing the recipient’s name instead of typing the recipient’s full
SMTP e-mail address. As you type the recipient’s name, the MFP searches the LDAP address
book for matching names, and then “autofills” the address field with the closest match. When you
select a specific recipient, the MFP uses LDAP to obtain the recipient’s full SMTP e-mail
address.
Use the following methods to find the IP addresses of the SMTP and LDAP servers.
Using Find Send Gateways
On the touch screen of the graphical display:
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Configure Device.
3
Touch Sending.
4
Touch E-mail.
5
Touch Find Send Gateways. The product searches your local network to try to determine the
IP address of the SMTP gateway and the IP address of the LDAP server. The numbers
appear briefly on the control-panel display.
If the SMTP server or LDAP server is outside of your local network, the Find Send Gateways
function will probably not be successful. The gateway addresses then appear as all zeros,
You will have to find the gateway addresses and type them.
To check or enter gateway addresses manually
ENWW
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Configure Device.
3
Touch Sending.
4
Touch E-mail.
5
Touch SMTP Gateway.
6
Type the SMTP gateway. The gateway address consists of up to 12 digits that are arrayed
as 4 groups of up to 3 digits (for instance, 123.123.123.123). To specify the address, type
the first group. Touch START. Then type the second, third, and fourth groups, touching START
after each. Touch OK.
7
Scroll to and touch LDAP Gateway.
Digital sending configuration applet 229
8
Type the LDAP gateway. Use the same procedure as for the SMTP gateway.
After you type the SMTP and the LDAP gateways, test the configuration by running the Send
Gateways self-test, and then send an e-mail.
To test the send gateways configuration
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Configure Device.
3
Touch Sending.
4
Touch E-mail.
Touch Test Send Gateways. If the configuration is correct Gateways OK appears on the
control-panel display.
If the first test was successful, send an e-mail to yourself. If you receive the e-mail, you have
successfully configured your digital-sending suite. If you do not receive the e-mail, use these
actions to resolve issues with the digital-sending software:
●
Check the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses to make sure that you typed them correctly.
●
Make sure that your network is operating correctly. Send an e-mail to yourself from your
computer. If you receive the e-mail, the network is operational. If you do not receive the
e-mail, call your network administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP).
●
Run the DISCOVER.EXE file. This program attempts to find the gateways. You can
download the file from the HP Web site at www.hp.com.
For additional product support, contact Hewlett-Packard at the phone numbers that are provided
in the support flyer that came with the product. More information is also available at www.hp.com/
support/lj9040mfp or www.hp.com/support/lj9050mfp.
Using your e-mail client
Because most e-mail clients also use SMTP to send e-mail and LDAP to address e-mail
messages, you might be able to find the hostname of the SMTP gateway and LDAP server by
looking at the settings for your e-mail client. For example, in Microsoft Outlook, you can find the
hostname by clicking Tools, selecting Services, highlighting the server, and then clicking
Properties. In many cases, the SMTP and LDAP servers are contained under one hostname.
After you have the hostname, you can find its IP address by using the following procedure:
1
At your computer, open the Command Prompt (also known as MS-DOS Prompt).
2
Type nslookup followed by the hostname (for example, nslookup hostname).
3
Press ENTER.
When you have found the IP address of the SMTP and LDAP servers, use them to configure
digital sending. The embedded Web server, HP Web Jetadmin, or the control panel can be used
to do this.
230 Appendix E Administration tasks
ENWW
Using control panel menus
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see Control panel menus. when
additional accessories are installed, new menu items automatically appear.
To print a control panel menu map
1
Touch Menu.
2
Touch Information.
3
Touch Print Menu Map.
4
Touch OK to exit the menu.
To change a control panel setting
1
Touch Menu.
2
Scroll to the menu you want and touch it to select it. Depending on the menu, you might have
to repeat this step to select a submenu.
3
Scroll to the item you want and touch it to select it.
4
Scroll to the value you want and touch it to select it. An asterisk (*) appears next to the
selection in the display, indicating that it is now the default.
5
Touch OK to exit the menu.
Settings in the driver and software override control panel settings. (Software settings override
driver settings.)
Device Storage Manager
The Device Storage Manager should be installed only on the computer of the system
administrator. The HP Disk Management Utility allows you to control the hard disk and flash
memory features that are not found in the drivers. Bidirectional communication is required.
Note
HP Disk Management Utility is not available for the Macintosh. If you are using a Macintosh, these
features are available in the HP LaserJet Utility (version 3.5.1 or later).
Use the HP Disk Management Utility to do the following:
ENWW
●
initialize disk and flash memory
●
download to, delete from, and manage fonts on disk and flash memory across networks
●
download PostScript Type 1, PostScript Type 42 (TrueType fonts converted to PostScript
format), TrueType, and PCL bitmap fonts. (To download Type 1 fonts, Adobe Type Manager
must be loaded and running.)
Using control panel menus 231
Software for networks
HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool and should be installed only on the
system administrator computer. HP Web Jetadmin is available from the Internet at www.hp.com/
go/webjetadmin.
Note
For the latest list of supported host systems, visit HP Customer Care Online at www.hp.com/go/
webjetadmin.
When installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin can be opened by any client through a
supported Web browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.x, or Netscape Navigator 4.x or
later) by browsing to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
Use HP Web Jetadmin to do the following:
●
Install and configure products that are connected to a network with an HP Jetdirect print
server.
●
Manage and troubleshoot network products from any location.
Checking the toner level by using HP Web Jetadmin
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the MFP. The device status page shows toner-level information.
HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX®
The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP-UX and
Sun Solaris networks. It is available for download at www.hp.com/support/net_printing.
232 Appendix E Administration tasks
ENWW
Diagnostics menu
System administrators can use this menu to isolate parts, and to troubleshoot jam and quality
issues.
Item
ENWW
Values
Explanation
PRINT EVENT
LOG
Generates a localized LIFO (last in, first out) list of the 50 most
recent entries in the error log. The printed event log shows error
number, page count, error code, and description or personality.
SHOW EVENT LOG
Allows the system administrator to scroll through the contents of
the event log from the control panel, and shows the 50 most
recent events.
PAPER PATH
TEST
Generates a test page that is useful for testing the paper-handling
features of the product.
SCANNER TESTS
Allows the system administrator to perform a variety of tests on
the scanner if a problem occurs. The system administrator works
in conjunction with a service technician to perform the scanner
tests.
CONTROL PANEL
Allows the system administrator to perform tests on the control
panel display if a problem occurs. The system administrator works
in conjunction with a service technician to perform the control
panel display tests.
Diagnostics menu 233
234 Appendix E Administration tasks
ENWW
F
Using the HTML Help Viewer
The following topics provide information about navigating and using this HTML Help User Guide.
For more information, click one of the following topics:
●
Getting more out of help
●
To find a help topic
●
To create a list of favorite help topics
●
To copy a help topic
●
To print the current help topic
●
To find topics using the toolbar buttons
●
Using the shortcut menu commands
Getting more out of help
Here are some tips on how to find more information when using the HTML Help Viewer:
●
To link to another topic, a Web page, a list of other topics, or a program, click the colored,
underlined words.
●
To view topics that contain related information, click the words, “Related Topics,” which can
appear at the end of a topic, and then click the title of the topic you want.
●
To see if a word or phrase contained in a topic is in the index, select the word, and then
press F1.
●
If you are viewing content from the Web in the Topic pane, you can click Stop or Refresh on
the toolbar to interrupt a download or refresh a Web page.
●
If you use a particular help topic often, you can add it to your favorites list.
●
Right-click the Contents tab or Topic pane for shortcut menu commands
To find a help topic
In the Navigation pane, click one of the following tabs:
Note
ENWW
●
To browse through a table of contents, click the Contents tab. The table of contents is an
expandable list of important topics.
●
To see a list of index entries, click the Index tab, and then type a word or scroll through the
list. Topics are often indexed under more than one entry.
●
To locate every occurrence of a word or phrase that can be contained in a help file, click the
Search tab, and then type the word.
Click the contents entry, index entry, or search results entry to display the corresponding topic.
Getting more out of help 235
To create a list of favorite help topics
1
Locate the help topic you want to make a favorite topic.
2
Click the Favorites tab, and then click Add.
Notes
●
To return to a favorite topic, click the Favorites tab, select the topic, and then click Display.
●
If you want to rename a topic, select the topic, and then type a new name in the Current
topic box.
●
To remove a favorite topic, select the topic and then click Remove.
To copy a help topic
Note
1
In the Topic pane, right-click the topic you want to copy, and then click Select All.
2
Right-click again, and then click Copy. This copies the topic to the Clipboard.
3
Open the document you want to copy the topic to.
4
Position your cursor where you want the information to appear.
5
On the Edit menu, click Paste.
If you want to copy only part of a topic, select the text you want to copy, right-click, and then click
Copy.
To print the current help topic
Right-click a topic, and then click Print.
Note
If you print from the Contents tab (by right-clicking an entry, and then clicking Print) you will see
options to print only the current topic, or the current topic and all subtopics.
To find topics using the toolbar buttons
There are five navigational buttons that can be located on the toolbar in the Help Viewer. You
can click these buttons to find help topics:
Note
●
Back displays the last topic you viewed.
●
Forward displays the next topic in a previously displayed sequence of topics.
●
Next displays the next topic listed in the table of contents.
●
Previous displays the previous topic listed in the table of contents.
●
Home displays the Home page topic for the help file you are viewing.
●
Refresh updates Web content that is currently displayed in the Topic pane.
●
Stop stops downloading file information. Click this button to stop a Web page from
downloading.
The toolbar in your Help Viewer can not contain all of these navigational buttons.
236 Appendix F Using the HTML Help Viewer
ENWW
Using the shortcut menu commands
There are several commands on the shortcut menu that you can use to display and customize
information.
Note
ENWW
Command
Description
Right-click in the table of
contents, and then click Open
All.
Right-click in the table of
contents, and then click Close
All.
Right-click, and then click Print.
Right-click in the table of
contents, and then click
Customize
Opens all books or folders in the table of contents. This command only
works if the Contents tab is displayed.
Closes all books or folders. This command only works if the Contents
tab is displayed.
Prints the topic.
Opens the Customize Information Wizard, which allows you to
customize the documentation. If the help file was built with information
types, you can use this wizard to select a subset of topics to view. For
example, you could choose to see only overview topics.
These commands can be accessed through the keyboard. You can click SHIFT+F10 to display
the shortcut menu, and then click the appropriate shortcut keys. Or, you can enable Mousekeys.
Use a Mousekey combination to display the shortcut menu, and then click the appropriate shortcut
keys.
Using the shortcut menu commands 237
238 Appendix F Using the HTML Help Viewer
ENWW
G
Using accessibility shortcut
keys in the Help Viewer
The following topics describe how you can navigate in this user guide.
●
Using F6 to switch between the Navigation and Topic Panes
●
Shortcut keys for the Help Viewer
●
Shortcut keys for the Contents tab
●
Shortcut keys for the Index tab
●
Shortcut keys for the Search tab
●
Shortcut keys for the Favorites tab
Notes
●
There are also shortcut menu commands that can be accessed through the keyboard.
●
Shortcut keys also work in secondary and pop-up windows.
●
Every time you use a shortcut key in the Navigation pane, you lose focus in the Topic pane.
To return to the Topic pane, press F6.
●
The Match similar words check box on the Search tab will be selected if you used it for
your last search.
Using F6 to switch between the Navigation and Topic Panes
You can quickly switch between the Navigation pane and the Topic pane by pressing F6 on the
keyboard.
Shortcut keys for the Help Viewer
To close the Help Viewer.
To switch between the Help Viewer and other open windows.
To display the Options menu.
To change Microsoft Internet Explorer settings. The Internet
Options dialog box contains accessibility settings. To change
these settings click the General tab, and then click
Accessibility.
To hide or show the Navigation pane.
To print a topic.
To move back to the previous topic.
ENWW
ALT+F4
ALT+TAB
ALT+O
ALT+O, and then press I
ALT+O, and then press T
ALT+O, and then press P, or right-click in
the topic and click Print
ALT+LEFT ARROW, or ALT+O, and then
press B
Using F6 to switch between the Navigation and Topic Panes 239
To move forward to the next topic (provided you have viewed it
just previously).
To turn on or off search highlighting.
To refresh the topic that appears in the Topic pane (this is
useful if you have linked to a Web page).
To return to the home page (help authors can specify a home
page for a help system).
To stop the viewer from opening a page (this is also useful if
you are linking to the Web and want to stop a page from
downloading).
To jump to a predetermined topic or Web page. The help
author who builds a compiled help (.chm) file can add two
links, on the Options menu, to important topics or Web pages.
When you select a Jump command you go to one of those
topics or Web pages.
To switch between the Navigation pane and the Topic pane.
To scroll through a topic.
To scroll through all the links in a topic or through all the
options on a Navigation pane tab.
ALT+RIGHT ARROW, or ALT+O, and then
press F
ALT+O, and then press O
F5, or ALT+O, and then press R
ALT+O, and then press H
ALT+O, and then press S
ALT+O, and then press 1 or 2
F6
UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW, or PAGE UP
and PAGE DOWN
TAB
Shortcut keys for the Contents tab
To display the Contents tab.
To open and close a book or folder.
To select a topic.
To display the selected topic.
ALT+C
PLUS SIGN (+) and MINUS SIGN (-), or LEFT
ARROW and RIGHT ARROW
UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW
ENTER
Shortcut keys for the Index tab
To display the Index tab.
To type a keyword to search for.
To select a keyword in the list.
To display the associated topic.
ALT+N
ALT+W, and then type the word
UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW
ALT+D
Shortcut keys for the Search tab
To display the Search tab.
To type a keyword to search for.
To start a search.
To select a topic in the results list.
ALT+S
ALT+W, and then type the word
ALT+L
ALT+T, and then UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW
To display the selected topic.
ALT+D
The following options are only available if full-text search is enabled.
To search for a keyword in the result list of a prior search.
ALT+U
To search for words similar to the keyword. For example, to
ALT+M
find words like “running” and “runs” for the keyword “run.”
To only search through topic titles.
ALT+R
240 Appendix G Using accessibility shortcut keys in the Help Viewer
ENWW
Shortcut keys for the Favorites tab
To display the Favorites tab.
To add the currently displayed topic to the Favorites list.
To select a topic in the Favorites list.
To display the selected topic.
To remove the selected topic from the list.
ENWW
ALT+I
ALT+A
ALT+P, and then UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW
ALT+D
ALT+R
Shortcut keys for the Favorites tab 241
242 Appendix G Using accessibility shortcut keys in the Help Viewer
ENWW
Index
Numerics
2000-sheet input tray. See Tray 4
3000-sheet stacker
bins 54
capacity 9
features 92
jams, clearing 129
ordering 11
paper sizes supported 185
selecting output location 55
staple jams, clearing 135
3000-sheet stacker/stapler
bins 54
capacity 9
error messages 151
jams, clearing 129
loading staples 93
not recognized 167
ordering 11
paper sizes supported 185
selecting output location 55
staple cartridge, ordering 11
staple jams, clearing 135
stapling documents 92
troubleshooting 166
8-bin mailbox
bins 54
capacity 9
features 99
jams, clearing 142
ordering 11
paper sizes supported 186
A
A4 paper
override letter settings 201
Wide A4 settings 201
accessories
locating 13
ordering 11
acoustical specifications 191
address book for digital sending 86, 87
ADF (automatic document feeder)
capacity 9
cleaning the delivery system 111
cleaning the rollers 114
cleaning the top glass strip 112
copying documents 77, 78
digital sending 84
error messages 145
locating 13
misfeeds 114
paper sizes supported 184
adhesive labels
fuser mode 203
loading 52
printing 29, 58
specifications 188
Alerts tab, HP Toolbox 27
alerts, setting up 119
alignment, troubleshooting 160
allocating memory 219
Alternate Letterhead mode 52
ENWW
anticounterfeit Web site 116
AppleTalk settings 209
Attention light on control panel 42
authenticating print cartridges 116
auto continue settings 206
auto setup, troubleshooting 163
auto-complete function 85
autoconfiguration, driver 14
automatic document feeder (ADF)
capacity 9
cleaning the delivery system 111
cleaning the rollers 114
cleaning the top glass strip 112
copying documents 77, 78
digital sending 84
error messages 145
locating 13
misfeeds 114
paper sizes supported 184
B
back page settings 64
Background Removal 79
background, gray 159, 187
base memory 8
battery disposal 222
bidirectional communication settings 207
bins
capacities 9, 184
full messages 145
included 9
jam locations 122
locating 54
mailbox 54
multifunction finisher 54
paper path test 177
paper sizes supported 185
selecting 55
stacker or stacker/stapler 54
troubleshooting 166
black dots, troubleshooting 118, 158
blank pages
adding 64
settings 202
troubleshooting 163
bleeds, printing 59
booklet bin, multifunction finisher 54
booklets, creating 99
books, copying 77
both sides, printing on
Alternate Letterhead 52
loading paper 48, 49
options 60
prepunched paper 51
settings 200
troubleshooting 164, 166
brightness, copy settings 78
browsers, HP Toolbox requirements 26
buffers
data remaining in, troubleshooting 164
EIO overflow messages 153
scan overflow messages 156
bulk returns, recycling 222
Index 243
buttons
control panel 42
copy-screen 74
e-mail screen 82
C
cables, troubleshooting 146, 168
calibration, trays 62
Cancel button, copy-screen 74
canceling jobs 43
capacity
accessories 185
bins 9, 184
trays 9, 184
card stock
printing 59
specifications 189
cards, EIO
buffer overflow messages 153
error messages 154, 156
included 9
ordering 12
slots, locating 13
carriage returns, settings 202
cartridges, print
authenticating 116
error messages 146, 149
low 206
non-HP 116
ordering 11
part numbers 181
recycling 222
replacing 118
shaking 119
storing 116
supplies status page 174
toner level, checking 117
usage information 175
cartridges, staple
jams, clearing from multifunction finisher 138
jams, clearing from stapler/stacker 135
loading in multifunction finisher 96
loading in stacker/stapler 93
ordering 11
characters
dropouts, troubleshooting 158
misformed, troubleshooting 160
symbol sets 202
Chooser, Macintosh 169
cleaning
ADF delivery system 111
ADF glass strip 112
ADF rollers 114
glass 110
MFP 108, 110
paper path 108
touch-screen 110
cleaning page, printing 118
clearable warnings, settings 205
clipped margins, troubleshooting 163
clock, setting 204
clothing, washing toner off 109
collation features 61
colored paper, copying 79
complex pages, troubleshooting 153
configuration page
information on 172
Jetdirect 25, 170
printing 195
Configure device menu 197
244 Index
contrast, copy settings 78
control panel
blank, troubleshooting 161
buttons 42
cleaning 110
Configure device menu 197
copy screen 74
Copying submenu 198
Diagnostics menu 211, 233
EIO Jetdirect menu 207
e-mail screen 82
Embedded Jetdirect submenu 208
Enhancement submenu 198
Fax menu 210
features 41
help 43, 45
I/O menu 207
Information menu 195
information pages 171
language 161, 206
locating 13
maintenance messages, resetting 120
menu map, printing 171, 195
messages 144
Originals submenu 197
page orientation, setting 60
Paper handling menu 196
Parallel input menu 207
PCL submenu 202
Print quality menu 203
Printing menu 200
Resets menu 210
Retrieve job menu 195
screens 44
Sending submenu 199
Service menu 212
settings 193, 231
System setup menu 204
testing 212
Web access feature 220
copies, number of 200
Copitrak 102
Copy Connect card error messages 146, 154
copying
books 77
colored paper, Background Removal 79
contrast, adjusting 78
control-panel screen 74
Enhance screen 78
features 8, 73
Job Mode 78
Originals submenu 197
selecting output location 80
sharpness control 79
storing jobs 79
using default settings 75
using the ADF 77
using the glass 77
using user-defined settings 75
Copying submenu 198
Courier font
settings 201
troubleshooting 165
creases, troubleshooting 160
crop marks, printing 59
curl, troubleshooting 160, 187
ENWW
custom media
loading 37, 50
loading trays 49
printing 59
sizes supported 184
tray selection 66
tray settings 40, 200
cut-off pages, troubleshooting 165
D
dark setting, toner density 204
Data light on control panel
flashing, troubleshooting 164
locating 42
not blinking, troubleshooting 168
on, troubleshooting 166
data missing, troubleshooting 164
data transmission settings 207
date, setting 204
DC controller error messages 155
default settings
copying 75
driver, changing 17
number of copies 200
restoring 43, 210
saving 61
deleting jobs
private 68
proof and hold 71
QuickCopy 70
stored 69
density settings 204
destinations, troubleshooting 165, 166
Device Settings button, HP Toolbox 28
Device Status, viewing in HP Toolbox 27
Device Storage Manager 231
DHCP settings 227
Diagnostics menu 211, 233
different first page 63
digital sending
address book 86, 87
configuration applet 228
features 84
more information 88
network requirements 81
Originals submenu 197
preferences 229
security 105
Sending submenu 199
software, ordering 12
using the glass or ADF 84
DIMMs
error messages 155
expansion options 8
installing 214
ordering 12
slots 213
verifying installation 219
directory, file 195
disk accessory
Device Storage Manager 231
erasing 103
features 10
file directory, printing 195
job retention 204
locking 105
not recognized 167
ordering 12
distributing toner 119
distribution list for digital sending 86
ENWW
DLC/LLC settings 209
doors
jam locations 122
left, clearing jams 134
locating 13
messages 147
right, clearing jams 123
vertical transfer, clearing jams 125
dots per inch (dpi) 8, 203
dots, troubleshooting 118, 158
double-sided printing
Alternate Letterhead mode 52
loading paper 48, 49
options 60
prepunched paper 51
settings 200
troubleshooting 164, 166
dpi (dots per inch) 8, 203
draft printing 204
drivers
autoconfiguration 14
Chooser, troubleshooting 169
features 16
help 16
HP OpenVMS 16
included 15
installing on Macintosh 21
installing on Windows 19
operating systems supported 15
overriding control panel settings 193
preconfiguration 15
saving settings 61
settings 17
troubleshooting 164
Update Now 15
dropouts, troubleshooting 158
duplex printing accessory
error messages 145, 147, 150
jam locations 122
jams, clearing 127
locating 13
not recognized 167
paper sizes supported 185
troubleshooting 164, 166
duplexing
Alternate Letterhead mode 52
loading paper 48, 49
options 60
prepunched paper 51
settings 200
troubleshooting 164, 166
duty cycle 7
E
EconoMode 204
edges not printing, troubleshooting 163
edge-to-edge mode 62, 201
EIO cards
buffer overflow messages 153
error messages 154, 156
included 9
ordering 12
slots, locating 13
Index 245
EIO disk
Device Storage Manager 231
erasing 103
features 10
file directory, printing 195
job retention 204
locking 105
not recognized 167
ordering 12
EIO Jetdirect menu 207
Electronic Industries Alliance 222
e-mail
address book 86, 87
addressing using auto-complete function 85
alerts 119
body text 88
digital sending features 84
From field 82
gateway error messages 147
LDAP error messages 149
more information 88
screen 82
settings 230
SMTP error messages 148, 151
Embedded Jetdirect submenu 208
embedded print server 25, 170
embedded Web server 226
accessing 25
alerts 119
digital sending configuration applet 228
features 24, 25
supplies status, checking 117, 226
TCP/IP settings 228
energy specifications 190
Energy Star compliance 221
Enhance copies 78
Enhancement submenu 198
enlarging copies 78
envelopes
default image size setting 200
loading 52, 55
margins 58
printing 29, 55
sizes supported 184
specifications 188
storing 189
wrinkles, troubleshooting 161
environment specifications 192
environmental stewardship 221
EPS files, troubleshooting 165
Equitrac 102
equivalence table for paper 180
erasing hard disk 103
error messages
alphabetical list 145
maintenance, resetting 120
numerical list 152
settings 205
troubleshooting 144
Ethernet support 9
event log
information on 172, 176
printing 176
viewing 211
expansion slots
DIMMs supported 213
Installed Personalities and Options 172
installing DIMMs 214
locating 13
extended warranty 223
246 Index
F
factory default settings 43, 210
faded print, troubleshooting 158
fans, troubleshooting 161
Fast Ethernet 10/100TX 9
FastRes 8, 203
fax card, ordering 12, 89
Fax menu 210
features
copying 8, 73
drivers 16
product 7
software 14
feeding modes, trays 65, 66
FIH (Foreign Interface Harness 102
file directory, printing 195
finisher. See multifunction finisher
firmware
error messages 154
updates 10
first page
different paper for 63
speed, specifications 7
speed, troubleshooting 164
Flash DIMMs, ordering 12
flash memory
installing 214, 217
upgrading 213
Font DIMMs, ordering 12
fonts
included 8
lists, printing 175, 195
settings 202
storing on EIO hard disk 10
troubleshooting 163, 165, 168
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) 102
form lines, settings 202
From field, e-mail messages 82
front door
jam locations 122
locating 13
open message 147
full-bleed images 59
fuser error messages 154
fuser levers 56, 58
fuser modes 203
fuser-area jams, clearing 134
fusing compatibility 187
G
garbled pages, troubleshooting 165
gateways
e-mail error messages 147
finding 229
LDAP error messages 149
settings 229
SMTP error messages 148
glass
cleaning 110
using for copying 77
gray background, troubleshooting 159, 187
Group button 86
ENWW
H
hard disk
Device Storage Manager 231
erasing 103
features 10
file directory, printing 195
job retention 204
locking 105
not recognized 167
ordering 12
heavy paper
printing 59
specifications 189
help
Contents tab 240
control panel 43, 45
copying topics 236
drivers 16
e-mail screen 82
favorites 236, 241
finding topics 235, 236
Index tab 240
printing topics 236
shortcuts 237, 239
HP Digital Sending software, ordering 12
HP Driver Preconfiguration 15
HP FastRes 8
HP Jetdirect page 173
HP Jetdirect print servers
ordering 12
settings 207, 208
troubleshooting 25, 170
HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX 23
HP LaserJet Utility 10, 19
HP media, part numbers 181
HP OpenVMS drivers 16
HP Printing Supplies Return and Recycling Programs 222
HP SupportPack 223
HP Toolbox
Alerts tab 27
alerts, setting up 119
Device Settings button 28
features 24, 26
links 28
opening 27
Status tab 27
supplies status 117
system requirements 26
HP Web Jetadmin
alerts, configuring 119
features 23, 232
IP addresses 227
supplies status, checking 117
humidity specifications 192
I
I/O buffer overflow messages 153
I/O menu 207
IBM OS/2 support 14, 16
image quality
cleaning page, printing 118
settings 203
troubleshooting 157
image size, setting default 200
indicator lights, control panel 42
Information menu 195
ENWW
information pages
configuration 172
event log 176
font lists 175
Jetdirect 173
menu map 171
printing 171, 195
supplies status 174
usage 175
Installed Personalities and Options 172
installing
flash memory 217
Macintosh software 21
memory 214
network software 20
print cartridges 119
printer maintenance kit 120
Windows software 19
insufficient memory 149, 153
interface problems, troubleshooting 167
IP address
configuring 227
finding 229
showing 205
IPX/SPX settings 209
J
jams, paper
8-bin mailbox 142
duplex printing accessory 127
error messages 152
fuser area 134
left door 134
locations 122
multifunction finisher 131
preventing 29
recovery settings 206
right door 123
stacker or stacker/stapler 129
Tray 1 123
Tray 2 or 3 124
Tray 4 125
troubleshooting repeated 143
jams, staple
multifunction finisher 138
stacker/stapler 135
troubleshooting frequent 165
Jetadmin
alerts, configuring 119
features 23, 232
IP addresses 227
supplies status, checking 117
Jetdirect page 173
Jetdirect print servers
ordering 12
settings 207, 208
troubleshooting 25, 170
Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX 23
Job Mode, using 78
Job Name, private jobs 67
Index 247
job retention
copying 79
error messages 152
features, accessing 67
limit, setting 204
private jobs 67
proof and hold 71
QuickCopy 70
Retrieve job menu 195
stored jobs 68
timeout settings 204
K
keypad on control panel 42, 43
keys. See buttons
L
labels
fuser mode 203
loading 52
printing 29, 58
specifications 188
LAN connector 9
landscape orientation
duplexing options 60
setting as default 202
language, control panel 161, 206
languages, printer
automatic switching 16
default, setting 205
error messages 146
included 8
list of installed, printing 172
troubleshooting 163
LaserJet Utility 10, 19
last page, not printing 166
Layout, multiple pages per sheet 64
LDAP
addressing settings 228
error messages 149
servers, finding 229
LEDs on control panel 42
left door
jam locations 122
jams, clearing 134
locating 13
open message 147
letter paper, override A4 settings 201
letterhead
Alternate Letterhead mode 52
fuser mode 203
printing on 58
specifications 187
light print
setting, toner density 204
troubleshooting 158
lights on control panel 42
line feed settings 202
line spacing, settings 202
lines, troubleshooting 158
link speed 210
links, HP Toolbox 28
Linux support 14, 16
load tray messages 149
248 Index
loading
custom media 37
documents for digital sending 84
envelopes 52, 55
labels 52
letterhead 52
paper, orientation 48
prepunched paper 51
staples in multifunction finisher 96
staples in stacker/stapler 93
Tray 1 29
Trays 2, 3, or 4 32, 35
local address book 87
LocalTalk connection 9
lock assembly 105
loose toner, troubleshooting 159
low print cartridges 206
M
Macintosh
driver settings 17
drivers included 15
HP LaserJet Utility 10, 19
installing software 21
operating systems supported 14
PPDs 15, 18
software included 18
troubleshooting communications 169
uninstalling software 23
mailbox
bins 54
capacity 9
features 99
jams, clearing 142
ordering 11
paper sizes supported 186
maintenance agreements 223
maintenance kit
installing 120
ordering 12
status 174
manual feed
control panel settings 201
first page 63
selecting 65
manufacturing page 176
margins
clipped, troubleshooting 163
edge-to-edge calibration settings 203
envelopes 58
Material Safety Data Sheets 223
ENWW
media
curl, troubleshooting 160
custom, loading 37
default image size setting 200
first page, different 63
fuser modes 203
HP, part numbers 181
letterhead mode 52
loading 29, 48
prepunched, loading 51
recycled 222
sizes supported 184
small, mode for 204
specifications 183, 187
transparencies 52
Tray 1 settings 65
troubleshooting 187
types supported 187
weight equivalence table 180
wrong wide, printing on 165
media jams. See jams, paper
memory
allocating 219
base 8
configuration page 172
DIMM error messages 155
flash cards, installing 217
installing 214
insufficient 149, 153
NVRAM error messages 156
ordering 12
upgrading 213, 214
verifying installation 219
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) 8
menu map, printing 171, 195
menus
Configure device 197
Copying 198
Diagnostics 211, 233
EIO Jetdirect 207
Embedded Jetdirect 208
Enhancement 198
Fax 210
I/O 207
Information 195
map, printing 171, 195
Originals 197
Paper handling 196
Parallel input 207
PCL 202
Print quality 203
Printing 200
Resets 210
Retrieve job 195
Sending 199
Service 212
settings 193, 231
System setup 204
mercury disposal 222
messages
alphabetical list 145
maintenance, resetting 120
numerical list 152
settings 205
troubleshooting 144
microprocessor speed 7
misalignment, troubleshooting 160
misfeeds in ADF 114
misformed characters, troubleshooting 160
missing data, troubleshooting 164
ENWW
modes
Alternate Letterhead 52
fuser 203
Job, copying 78
tray 65, 66
mopying (multiple original prints) 61
multifeeds in ADF 114
multifunction finisher
bins 54
booklets, creating 99
capacity 9
jams, clearing 131
ordering 11
paper sizes supported 186
staple cartridge, ordering 11
staple jams, clearing 138
staples, loading 96
using 95
multiple original prints (mopying) 61
multiple pages per sheet 64
multipurpose tray. See Tray 1
N
narrow media settings 204
networks
cards, included 9
cards, ordering 12
digital sending requirements 81
HP Driver Preconfiguration 15
HP Jetdirect print servers 25, 170
installing software 20
IP address 227
settings 207, 208
software for 23, 232
speed 210
troubleshooting 166
No back page 64
noise specifications 191
non-HP print cartridges 116
number of copies, setting default 200
numeric keypad on control panel 42, 43
n-up printing 64
NVRAM error messages 156
O
OK button, copy-screen 74
online help
Contents tab 240
control panel 43, 45
copying topics 236
drivers 16
e-mail screen 82
favorites 236, 241
finding topics 235, 236
Index tab 240
printing topics 236
shortcuts 237, 239
OpenVMS drivers 16
operating environment, specifications 192
operating systems supported
drivers 15
HP Toolbox 26
printing system software 14
order cartridge messages 118
ordering
accessories 11
supplies 181
Index 249
orientation, page
default 202
duplexing options 60
loading paper 48
Originals submenu 197
OS/2 support 14, 16
output quality
cleaning page, printing 118
settings 203
troubleshooting 157
overprints, troubleshooting 165
override A4/letter 201
ozone specifications 221
P
page count
resetting 120
viewing 172, 176
page orientation
default 202
duplexing options 60
loading paper 48
page skew, troubleshooting 160
pages not printing
all 163
last 166
partial 165
stops mid-job 168
pages per minute 7
Pages Per Sheet 64
paper
curl, troubleshooting 160
custom, loading 37
default image size setting 200
first page, different 63
fuser modes 203
HP, part numbers 181
letterhead mode 52
loading 29, 48
prepunched, loading 51
recycled 222
sizes supported 184
small, mode for 204
specifications 183, 187
Tray 1 settings 65
troubleshooting 187
types supported 187
weight equivalence table 180
wrong side, printing on 165
Paper handling menu 196
paper path
cleaning 108
test 177, 211
parallel communication settings 207
parallel connection messages 153
Parallel input menu 207
part numbers
accessories 11
supplies 181
partial pages, troubleshooting 165
PCL drivers 15, 16
PCL font list, printing 175, 195
PCL submenu 202
PDEs, Macintosh 18
PDF error pages 201
Perform Printer Maintenance message 120
permanent resources 219
250 Index
personalities
automatic switching 16
default, setting 205
error messages 146
included 8
list of installed, printing 172
troubleshooting 163
photocopying. See copying
PINs
error messages 149
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) 102
releasing private jobs 67
portrait orientation
duplexing options 60
setting as default 202
ports
parallel buffer overflow 153
troubleshooting 168
types supported 9
postcards
printing 59
specifications 189
PostScript emulation drivers 15, 16
PostScript error pages 163, 201
PostScript font list, printing 175, 195
PostScript jobs, troubleshooting 168
power
Energy Star compliance 221
specifications 190
troubleshooting 161, 167
PPDs, Macintosh 15, 18
preconfiguration, driver 15
preprinted paper
fuser mode 203
printing on 58
specifications 187
prepunched paper
fuser mode 203
loading 51
printing 58
print cartridges
authenticating 116
error messages 146, 149
low 206
non-HP 116
ordering 11
part numbers 181
recycling 222
replacing 118
shaking 119
storing 116
supplies status page 174
toner level, checking 117
usage information 175
print quality
cleaning page, printing 118
settings 203
troubleshooting 157
Print quality menu 203
printer languages
automatic switching 16
default, setting 205
error messages 146
included 8
list of installed 172
troubleshooting 163
printer maintenance kit
installing 120
ordering 12
status 174
ENWW
printing
basic instructions 53
cleaning page 118
envelopes 55
event log 176
private jobs 68
proof and hold jobs 71
QuickCopy jobs 70
stored jobs 69
troubleshooting 163
Printing menu 200
private jobs
control panel settings 195
deleting 68
options 67
printing 67
timeout settings 204
processor speed 7
proof and hold jobs
control panel settings 195
creating 71
deleting 71
options 67
printing 71
timeout settings 204
protocol settings 208, 227
PS drivers 15, 16
PS error pages 163, 201
PS font list, printing 175, 195
PS jobs, troubleshooting 168
Q
quality
cleaning page, printing 118
settings 203
troubleshooting 157
quick sets 61
QuickCopy jobs
control panel settings 195
creating 70
deleting 70
options 67
printing 70
timeout settings 204
R
Ready light on control panel 42
recipient lists 86
recovery setting for jams 206
recycled paper 222
recycling supplies 222
redistributing toner 119
reducing copies 78
registration, trays 62
releasing jobs
private 68
proof and hold 71
stored 69
removing software
Macintosh 23
Windows 22
repeating defects, troubleshooting 159
replace cartridge message 118
ENWW
reports
configuration page 172
event log 176
font lists 175
Jetdirect page 173
menu map 171
printing 171, 195
supplies status page 174
usage page 175
Reset button on control panel 42, 43
Resets menu 210
resetting page count 120
resizing copies 78
resolution 8
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) settings 204
resolution settings 203
resource saving 219
restoring default settings 43, 210
REt (Resolution Enhancement technology) settings 204
retention, job. See job retention
Retrieve job menu 195
returns, recycling 222
review copies, printing 71
right door
error messages 147
jam locations 122
jams, clearing 123
locating 13
open message 147
rollers
ADF, cleaning 114
printer maintenance kit 12, 120
S
saddle stitching 99
saving settings 61
scaling copies 78
scan buffer errors 156
scanning documents to send 84
security
digital sending 105
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) 102
hard disk erase 103
information, configuration page 172
lock assembly 105
sending documents 84
Sending submenu 199
sending. See digital sending
serial number
cartridges 174
printer 172
serial port 9
service agreements 223
Service menu 212
Set Registration 62
settings
configuration page 172
control panel 231
copy 75
driver 17
overriding 193
paper size 40
restoring defaults 43, 210
saving 61
Web access feature 220
shaking print cartridge 119
shared printers, troubleshooting 166
sharing, Windows 20
sharpness, copies 79
shortcuts, help 237
Index 251
Show me how Help 45
sizes, paper
selecting trays by 66
supported 184
tray settings 40
skewed pages, troubleshooting 160
Sleep mode
power consumption 190
settings 205
slots
DIMMs supported 213
Installed Personalities and Options 172
installing DIMMs 214
slow printing, troubleshooting 164, 168
small paper mode 204
smeared toner, troubleshooting 159
SMTP servers 148, 229
software
features 14
FIH (Foreign Interface Harness) 102
HP Digital Sending, ordering 12
installing on Macintosh 21
installing on Windows 19
Macintosh 18
network 23, 232
operating systems supported 14
troubleshooting 164
uninstalling Macintosh 23
uninstalling Windows 22
sound specifications 191
specifications
acoustical 191
card stock 189
envelopes 188
labels 188
ozone 221
paper 183, 187
power 190
transparencies 188
trays and bins 9
specks, troubleshooting 118, 158
speed
data transmission settings 207
network 210
processor 7
resolution settings 203
specifications 7
troubleshooting 164, 168
stacker
bins 54
capacity 9
features 92
jams, clearing 129
ordering 11
paper sizes supported 185
selecting output location 55
staple jams, clearing 135
stacker/stapler
bins 54
capacity 9
error messages 151
jams, clearing 129
loading staples 93
not recognized 167
ordering 11
paper sizes supported 185
selecting output location 55
staple cartridge, ordering 11
staple jams, clearing 135
stapling documents 92
troubleshooting 166
252 Index
staple cartridges
jams, clearing from multifunction finisher 138
jams, clearing from stacker/stapler 135
loading in multifunction finisher 96
loading in stacker/stapler 93
ordering 11
staple jams, clearing
multifunction finisher 138
stacker/stapler 135
troubleshooting frequent 165
stapling documents
booklets 99
multifunction finisher 95
stacker/stapler 92
troubleshooting 166
Start button on control panel 42, 43
status lights, control panel 42
Status tab, HP Toolbox 27
status, supplies
information page 174, 195
viewing in HP Toolbox 27
Stop button on control panel 42, 43
stopped printing 168
stopping printing 43
stored jobs
control panel settings 195
copying 79
creating 68
deleting 69
error messages 152
options 67
printing 69
timeout settings 204
storing
envelopes 189
print cartridges 116
product, specifications 192
storing jobs. See job retention
supplies
ordering 11
part numbers 181
printer maintenance kit, installing 120
recycling 222
status page 174, 195
status, viewing in HP Toolbox 27
SupportPack, HP 223
symbol sets 202
system requirements
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) 102
HP Toolbox 26
printing software 14
System setup menu 204
T
TCP/IP settings 208, 227
temperature
fusing compatibility, media 187
operating environment specifications 192
tests
control panel 212
paper path 177, 211
scanner 211
text, troubleshooting
dropouts 158
misformed 160
time, setting 204
timeout settings
held jobs 204
I/O 207
Sleep mode 205
ENWW
toner
adhesion problems 187
checking level 117
density settings 204
loose, troubleshooting 159
smear, troubleshooting 159
specks, troubleshooting 118, 158
usage information 175
washing off clothing 109
Toolbox, HP
Alerts tab 27
alerts, setting up 119
Device Settings button 28
features 24, 26
links 28
opening 27
Status tab 27
supplies status 117
system requirements 26
touch-screen, cleaning 110
transparencies
fuser mode 203
HP, part numbers 181
loading 52
printing 59
specifications 188
Tray 1
capacity 9, 184
configuration page 172
custom media, loading 49
envelopes, loading 52
error messages 149
feeding modes, setting 65
first page, different paper for 63
full-bleed images 59
fuser levers 56, 58
heavy paper, printing 59
jam locations 122
jams, clearing 123
labels, loading 52, 58
loading envelopes 55
loading paper 29, 48
locating 13
manual feed mode 65
paper sizes supported 184
paper type settings 66
prepunched paper, loading 51
registration 62
setting paper size 40
Tray 2 or 3
capacity 9, 184
configuration page 172
custom media, loading 37, 50
heavy paper, printing 59
jam locations 122
jams, clearing 124
loading detectable standard-size paper 32
loading paper, orientation 49
loading undetectable standard-size paper 35
locating 13
paper sizes supported 184
paper type settings 66, 196
prepunched paper, loading 51
registration 62
setting paper size 40
troubleshooting selection 163, 167
ENWW
Tray 4
capacity 9, 184
configuration page 172
custom media
loading 37
custom media, loading 50
heavy paper, printing 59
jam locations 122
jams, clearing 125
loading detectable standard-size paper 32
loading paper, orientation 49
loading undetectable standard-size paper 35
locating 13
not recognized 167
paper sizes supported 184
paper type settings 66, 196
prepunched paper, loading 51
registration 62
setting paper size 40
troubleshooting 166
troubleshooting selection 163, 167
trays
capacities 9, 184
configuration page 172
custom media, loading 49, 50
heavy paper, printing 59
included 9
jam locations 122
jams, clearing 123
load error messages 149
loading 29, 48
locating 13
paper path test 177, 211
paper sizes supported 184
registration 62
selecting 66
setting paper size 40
troubleshooting selection 163, 167
unexpected size error messages 154
Index 253
troubleshooting
ADF misfeeds 114
bins 166
blank pages 163
checklist 161
control panel messages 144
control panel, blank 161
curled pages 160
data transmission 164
Diagnostics menu 211
dropouts 158
fonts 163, 165, 168
gray background 159, 187
hard disk 167
HP Jetdirect print servers 25, 170
image defects 157
information pages 171
jams, clearing 122
jams, frequent 143
light print 158
lines 158
loose toner 159
Macintosh issues 169
networks 166, 170
paper 187
paper path test 177, 211
ports 168
power 161, 167
printing 163
PS error pages 163
quality 157
repeating defects 159
skewed pages 160
slow printing 168
smeared toner 159
software 164
specks 118, 158
text, misformed characters 160
Tray 4 166, 167
trays 163, 167
wrinkled envelopes 161
wrinkled pages 160
wrong side, printing on 165
TrueType fonts included 8
two-sided printing
Alternate Letterhead mode 52
loading paper 48, 49
options 60
prepunched paper 51
settings 200
troubleshooting 164, 166
types, paper
selecting trays by 66
supported 187
tray settings 196
U
uninstalling software
Macintosh 23
Windows 22
UNIX
carriage return settings 202
HP Jetdirect Printer Installer utility 23
model scripts 16
support 14
Update Now button, drivers 15
upgrading
firmware 10
flash memory, installing 217
memory 213, 214
254 Index
usage page
information on 175
printing 195
USB port, supported 9
Use different paper for first page 63
User Name, private jobs 67
V
vertical line spacing settings 202
vertical transfer door
jam locations 122
jams, clearing 125
locating 13
voltage
specifications 190
troubleshooting 161
W
wake time, setting 205
warranty, extended 223
washing off toner 109
watermarks, printing 61
wave, troubleshooting 160
Web access feature 220
Web Jetadmin
alerts, configuring 119
features 23, 232
IP addresses 227
supplies status, checking 117
Web sites
anticounterfeit 116
Electronic Industries Alliance 222
firmware updates 10
HP OpenVMS drivers 16
Material Safety Data Sheets 223
paper guidelines 183
recycling supplies 222
software, downloading 14
UNIX and Linux support 16
weight equivalence table, paper 180
weight, paper
heavy 189
supported 184
What is this? Help 43, 45
Wide A4 setting 201
Windows
driver settings 17
drivers included 15
installing software 19
networks, installing software 20
uninstalling software 22
versions supported 14
Wireless network card 9
wrinkles, troubleshooting
envelopes 161
pages 160, 187
wrong side, pages printing on 165
ENWW
© 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*Q3726-90907*
*Q3726-90907*
Q3726-90907
">